5debc5d98664816574712ef2dcae1afcef772b9b
1 =encoding UTF-8
3 =head1 NAME
5 collectd.conf - Configuration for the system statistics collection daemon B<collectd>
7 =head1 SYNOPSIS
9 BaseDir "/var/lib/collectd"
10 PIDFile "/run/collectd.pid"
11 Interval 10.0
13 LoadPlugin cpu
14 LoadPlugin load
16 <LoadPlugin df>
17 Interval 3600
18 </LoadPlugin>
19 <Plugin df>
20 ValuesPercentage true
21 </Plugin>
23 LoadPlugin ping
24 <Plugin ping>
25 Host "example.org"
26 Host "provider.net"
27 </Plugin>
29 =head1 DESCRIPTION
31 This config file controls how the system statistics collection daemon
32 B<collectd> behaves. The most significant option is B<LoadPlugin>, which
33 controls which plugins to load. These plugins ultimately define collectd's
34 behavior. If the B<AutoLoadPlugin> option has been enabled, the explicit
35 B<LoadPlugin> lines may be omitted for all plugins with a configuration block,
36 i.e. a C<E<lt>PluginE<nbsp>...E<gt>> block.
38 The syntax of this config file is similar to the config file of the famous
39 I<Apache> webserver. Each line contains either an option (a key and a list of
40 one or more values) or a section-start or -end. Empty lines and everything
41 after a non-quoted hash-symbol (C<#>) are ignored. I<Keys> are unquoted
42 strings, consisting only of alphanumeric characters and the underscore (C<_>)
43 character. Keys are handled case insensitive by I<collectd> itself and all
44 plugins included with it. I<Values> can either be an I<unquoted string>, a
45 I<quoted string> (enclosed in double-quotes) a I<number> or a I<boolean>
46 expression. I<Unquoted strings> consist of only alphanumeric characters and
47 underscores (C<_>) and do not need to be quoted. I<Quoted strings> are
48 enclosed in double quotes (C<">). You can use the backslash character (C<\>)
49 to include double quotes as part of the string. I<Numbers> can be specified in
50 decimal and floating point format (using a dot C<.> as decimal separator),
51 hexadecimal when using the C<0x> prefix and octal with a leading zero (C<0>).
52 I<Boolean> values are either B<true> or B<false>.
54 Lines may be wrapped by using C<\> as the last character before the newline.
55 This allows long lines to be split into multiple lines. Quoted strings may be
56 wrapped as well. However, those are treated special in that whitespace at the
57 beginning of the following lines will be ignored, which allows for nicely
58 indenting the wrapped lines.
60 The configuration is read and processed in order, i.e. from top to bottom. So
61 the plugins are loaded in the order listed in this config file. It is a good
62 idea to load any logging plugins first in order to catch messages from plugins
63 during configuration. Also, unless B<AutoLoadPlugin> is enabled, the
64 B<LoadPlugin> option I<must> occur I<before> the appropriate
65 C<E<lt>B<Plugin> ...E<gt>> block.
67 =head1 GLOBAL OPTIONS
69 =over 4
71 =item B<BaseDir> I<Directory>
73 Sets the base directory. This is the directory beneath which all RRD-files are
74 created. Possibly more subdirectories are created. This is also the working
75 directory for the daemon.
77 =item B<LoadPlugin> I<Plugin>
79 Loads the plugin I<Plugin>. This is required to load plugins, unless the
80 B<AutoLoadPlugin> option is enabled (see below). Without any loaded plugins,
81 I<collectd> will be mostly useless.
83 Only the first B<LoadPlugin> statement or block for a given plugin name has any
84 effect. This is useful when you want to split up the configuration into smaller
85 files and want each file to be "self contained", i.e. it contains a B<Plugin>
86 block I<and> the appropriate B<LoadPlugin> statement. The downside is that if
87 you have multiple conflicting B<LoadPlugin> blocks, e.g. when they specify
88 different intervals, only one of them (the first one encountered) will take
89 effect and all others will be silently ignored.
91 B<LoadPlugin> may either be a simple configuration I<statement> or a I<block>
92 with additional options, affecting the behavior of B<LoadPlugin>. A simple
93 statement looks like this:
95 LoadPlugin "cpu"
97 Options inside a B<LoadPlugin> block can override default settings and
98 influence the way plugins are loaded, e.g.:
100 <LoadPlugin perl>
101 Interval 60
102 </LoadPlugin>
104 The following options are valid inside B<LoadPlugin> blocks:
106 =over 4
108 =item B<Globals> B<true|false>
110 If enabled, collectd will export all global symbols of the plugin (and of all
111 libraries loaded as dependencies of the plugin) and, thus, makes those symbols
112 available for resolving unresolved symbols in subsequently loaded plugins if
113 that is supported by your system.
115 This is useful (or possibly even required), e.g., when loading a plugin that
116 embeds some scripting language into the daemon (e.g. the I<Perl> and
117 I<Python plugins>). Scripting languages usually provide means to load
118 extensions written in C. Those extensions require symbols provided by the
119 interpreter, which is loaded as a dependency of the respective collectd plugin.
120 See the documentation of those plugins (e.g., L<collectd-perl(5)> or
121 L<collectd-python(5)>) for details.
123 By default, this is disabled. As a special exception, if the plugin name is
124 either C<perl> or C<python>, the default is changed to enabled in order to keep
125 the average user from ever having to deal with this low level linking stuff.
127 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
129 Sets a plugin-specific interval for collecting metrics. This overrides the
130 global B<Interval> setting. If a plugin provides its own support for specifying
131 an interval, that setting will take precedence.
133 =item B<FlushInterval> I<Seconds>
135 Specifies the interval, in seconds, to call the flush callback if it's
136 defined in this plugin. By default, this is disabled.
138 =item B<FlushTimeout> I<Seconds>
140 Specifies the value of the timeout argument of the flush callback.
142 =back
144 =item B<AutoLoadPlugin> B<false>|B<true>
146 When set to B<false> (the default), each plugin needs to be loaded explicitly,
147 using the B<LoadPlugin> statement documented above. If a
148 B<E<lt>PluginE<nbsp>...E<gt>> block is encountered and no configuration
149 handling callback for this plugin has been registered, a warning is logged and
150 the block is ignored.
152 When set to B<true>, explicit B<LoadPlugin> statements are not required. Each
153 B<E<lt>PluginE<nbsp>...E<gt>> block acts as if it was immediately preceded by a
154 B<LoadPlugin> statement. B<LoadPlugin> statements are still required for
155 plugins that don't provide any configuration, e.g. the I<Load plugin>.
157 =item B<CollectInternalStats> B<false>|B<true>
159 When set to B<true>, various statistics about the I<collectd> daemon will be
160 collected, with "collectd" as the I<plugin name>. Defaults to B<false>.
162 The following metrics are reported:
164 =over 4
166 =item C<collectd-write_queue/queue_length>
168 The number of metrics currently in the write queue. You can limit the queue
169 length with the B<WriteQueueLimitLow> and B<WriteQueueLimitHigh> options.
171 =item C<collectd-write_queue/derive-dropped>
173 The number of metrics dropped due to a queue length limitation.
174 If this value is non-zero, your system can't handle all incoming metrics and
175 protects itself against overload by dropping metrics.
177 =item C<collectd-cache/cache_size>
179 The number of elements in the metric cache (the cache you can interact with
180 using L<collectd-unixsock(5)>).
182 =back
184 =item B<Include> I<Path> [I<pattern>]
186 If I<Path> points to a file, includes that file. If I<Path> points to a
187 directory, recursively includes all files within that directory and its
188 subdirectories. If the C<wordexp> function is available on your system,
189 shell-like wildcards are expanded before files are included. This means you can
190 use statements like the following:
192 Include "/etc/collectd.d/*.conf"
194 Starting with version 5.3, this may also be a block in which further options
195 affecting the behavior of B<Include> may be specified. The following option is
196 currently allowed:
198 <Include "/etc/collectd.d">
199 Filter "*.conf"
200 </Include>
202 =over 4
204 =item B<Filter> I<pattern>
206 If the C<fnmatch> function is available on your system, a shell-like wildcard
207 I<pattern> may be specified to filter which files to include. This may be used
208 in combination with recursively including a directory to easily be able to
209 arbitrarily mix configuration files and other documents (e.g. README files).
210 The given example is similar to the first example above but includes all files
211 matching C<*.conf> in any subdirectory of C</etc/collectd.d>.
213 =back
215 If more than one file is included by a single B<Include> option, the files
216 will be included in lexicographical order (as defined by the C<strcmp>
217 function). Thus, you can e.E<nbsp>g. use numbered prefixes to specify the
218 order in which the files are loaded.
220 To prevent loops and shooting yourself in the foot in interesting ways the
221 nesting is limited to a depth of 8E<nbsp>levels, which should be sufficient for
222 most uses. Since symlinks are followed it is still possible to crash the daemon
223 by looping symlinks. In our opinion significant stupidity should result in an
224 appropriate amount of pain.
226 It is no problem to have a block like C<E<lt>Plugin fooE<gt>> in more than one
227 file, but you cannot include files from within blocks.
229 =item B<PIDFile> I<File>
231 Sets where to write the PID file to. This file is overwritten when it exists
232 and deleted when the program is stopped. Some init-scripts might override this
233 setting using the B<-P> command-line option.
235 =item B<PluginDir> I<Directory>
237 Path to the plugins (shared objects) of collectd.
239 =item B<TypesDB> I<File> [I<File> ...]
241 Set one or more files that contain the data-set descriptions. See
242 L<types.db(5)> for a description of the format of this file.
244 If this option is not specified, a default file is read. If you need to define
245 custom types in addition to the types defined in the default file, you need to
246 explicitly load both. In other words, if the B<TypesDB> option is encountered
247 the default behavior is disabled and if you need the default types you have to
248 also explicitly load them.
250 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
252 Configures the interval in which to query the read plugins. Obviously smaller
253 values lead to a higher system load produced by collectd, while higher values
254 lead to more coarse statistics.
256 B<Warning:> You should set this once and then never touch it again. If you do,
257 I<you will have to delete all your RRD files> or know some serious RRDtool
258 magic! (Assuming you're using the I<RRDtool> or I<RRDCacheD> plugin.)
260 =item B<MaxReadInterval> I<Seconds>
262 A read plugin doubles the interval between queries after each failed attempt
263 to get data.
265 This options limits the maximum value of the interval. The default value is
266 B<86400>.
268 =item B<Timeout> I<Iterations>
270 Consider a value list "missing" when no update has been read or received for
271 I<Iterations> iterations. By default, I<collectd> considers a value list
272 missing when no update has been received for twice the update interval. Since
273 this setting uses iterations, the maximum allowed time without update depends
274 on the I<Interval> information contained in each value list. This is used in
275 the I<Threshold> configuration to dispatch notifications about missing values,
276 see L<collectd-threshold(5)> for details.
278 =item B<ReadThreads> I<Num>
280 Number of threads to start for reading plugins. The default value is B<5>, but
281 you may want to increase this if you have more than five plugins that take a
282 long time to read. Mostly those are plugins that do network-IO. Setting this to
283 a value higher than the number of registered read callbacks is not recommended.
285 =item B<WriteThreads> I<Num>
287 Number of threads to start for dispatching value lists to write plugins. The
288 default value is B<5>, but you may want to increase this if you have more than
289 five plugins that may take relatively long to write to.
291 =item B<WriteQueueLimitHigh> I<HighNum>
293 =item B<WriteQueueLimitLow> I<LowNum>
295 Metrics are read by the I<read threads> and then put into a queue to be handled
296 by the I<write threads>. If one of the I<write plugins> is slow (e.g. network
297 timeouts, I/O saturation of the disk) this queue will grow. In order to avoid
298 running into memory issues in such a case, you can limit the size of this
299 queue.
301 By default, there is no limit and memory may grow indefinitely. This is most
302 likely not an issue for clients, i.e. instances that only handle the local
303 metrics. For servers it is recommended to set this to a non-zero value, though.
305 You can set the limits using B<WriteQueueLimitHigh> and B<WriteQueueLimitLow>.
306 Each of them takes a numerical argument which is the number of metrics in the
307 queue. If there are I<HighNum> metrics in the queue, any new metrics I<will> be
308 dropped. If there are less than I<LowNum> metrics in the queue, all new metrics
309 I<will> be enqueued. If the number of metrics currently in the queue is between
310 I<LowNum> and I<HighNum>, the metric is dropped with a probability that is
311 proportional to the number of metrics in the queue (i.e. it increases linearly
312 until it reaches 100%.)
314 If B<WriteQueueLimitHigh> is set to non-zero and B<WriteQueueLimitLow> is
315 unset, the latter will default to half of B<WriteQueueLimitHigh>.
317 If you do not want to randomly drop values when the queue size is between
318 I<LowNum> and I<HighNum>, set B<WriteQueueLimitHigh> and B<WriteQueueLimitLow>
319 to the same value.
321 Enabling the B<CollectInternalStats> option is of great help to figure out the
322 values to set B<WriteQueueLimitHigh> and B<WriteQueueLimitLow> to.
324 =item B<Hostname> I<Name>
326 Sets the hostname that identifies a host. If you omit this setting, the
327 hostname will be determined using the L<gethostname(2)> system call.
329 =item B<FQDNLookup> B<true|false>
331 If B<Hostname> is determined automatically this setting controls whether or not
332 the daemon should try to figure out the "fully qualified domain name", FQDN.
333 This is done using a lookup of the name returned by C<gethostname>. This option
334 is enabled by default.
336 =item B<PreCacheChain> I<ChainName>
338 =item B<PostCacheChain> I<ChainName>
340 Configure the name of the "pre-cache chain" and the "post-cache chain". Please
341 see L<FILTER CONFIGURATION> below on information on chains and how these
342 setting change the daemon's behavior.
344 =back
346 =head1 PLUGIN OPTIONS
348 Some plugins may register own options. These options must be enclosed in a
349 C<Plugin>-Section. Which options exist depends on the plugin used. Some plugins
350 require external configuration, too. The C<apache plugin>, for example,
351 required C<mod_status> to be configured in the webserver you're going to
352 collect data from. These plugins are listed below as well, even if they don't
353 require any configuration within collectd's configuration file.
355 A list of all plugins and a short summary for each plugin can be found in the
356 F<README> file shipped with the sourcecode and hopefully binary packets as
357 well.
359 =head2 Plugin C<aggregation>
361 The I<Aggregation plugin> makes it possible to aggregate several values into
362 one using aggregation functions such as I<sum>, I<average>, I<min> and I<max>.
363 This can be put to a wide variety of uses, e.g. average and total CPU
364 statistics for your entire fleet.
366 The grouping is powerful but, as with many powerful tools, may be a bit
367 difficult to wrap your head around. The grouping will therefore be
368 demonstrated using an example: The average and sum of the CPU usage across
369 all CPUs of each host is to be calculated.
371 To select all the affected values for our example, set C<Plugin cpu> and
372 C<Type cpu>. The other values are left unspecified, meaning "all values". The
373 I<Host>, I<Plugin>, I<PluginInstance>, I<Type> and I<TypeInstance> options
374 work as if they were specified in the C<WHERE> clause of an C<SELECT> SQL
375 statement.
377 Plugin "cpu"
378 Type "cpu"
380 Although the I<Host>, I<PluginInstance> (CPU number, i.e. 0, 1, 2, ...) and
381 I<TypeInstance> (idle, user, system, ...) fields are left unspecified in the
382 example, the intention is to have a new value for each host / type instance
383 pair. This is achieved by "grouping" the values using the C<GroupBy> option.
384 It can be specified multiple times to group by more than one field.
386 GroupBy "Host"
387 GroupBy "TypeInstance"
389 We do neither specify nor group by I<plugin instance> (the CPU number), so all
390 metrics that differ in the CPU number only will be aggregated. Each
391 aggregation needs I<at least one> such field, otherwise no aggregation would
392 take place.
394 The full example configuration looks like this:
396 <Plugin "aggregation">
397 <Aggregation>
398 Plugin "cpu"
399 Type "cpu"
401 GroupBy "Host"
402 GroupBy "TypeInstance"
404 CalculateSum true
405 CalculateAverage true
406 </Aggregation>
407 </Plugin>
409 There are a couple of limitations you should be aware of:
411 =over 4
413 =item *
415 The I<Type> cannot be left unspecified, because it is not reasonable to add
416 apples to oranges. Also, the internal lookup structure won't work if you try
417 to group by type.
419 =item *
421 There must be at least one unspecified, ungrouped field. Otherwise nothing
422 will be aggregated.
424 =back
426 As you can see in the example above, each aggregation has its own
427 B<Aggregation> block. You can have multiple aggregation blocks and aggregation
428 blocks may match the same values, i.e. one value list can update multiple
429 aggregations. The following options are valid inside B<Aggregation> blocks:
431 =over 4
433 =item B<Host> I<Host>
435 =item B<Plugin> I<Plugin>
437 =item B<PluginInstance> I<PluginInstance>
439 =item B<Type> I<Type>
441 =item B<TypeInstance> I<TypeInstance>
443 Selects the value lists to be added to this aggregation. B<Type> must be a
444 valid data set name, see L<types.db(5)> for details.
446 If the string starts with and ends with a slash (C</>), the string is
447 interpreted as a I<regular expression>. The regex flavor used are POSIX
448 extended regular expressions as described in L<regex(7)>. Example usage:
450 Host "/^db[0-9]\\.example\\.com$/"
452 =item B<GroupBy> B<Host>|B<Plugin>|B<PluginInstance>|B<TypeInstance>
454 Group valued by the specified field. The B<GroupBy> option may be repeated to
455 group by multiple fields.
457 =item B<SetHost> I<Host>
459 =item B<SetPlugin> I<Plugin>
461 =item B<SetPluginInstance> I<PluginInstance>
463 =item B<SetTypeInstance> I<TypeInstance>
465 Sets the appropriate part of the identifier to the provided string.
467 The I<PluginInstance> should include the placeholder C<%{aggregation}> which
468 will be replaced with the aggregation function, e.g. "average". Not including
469 the placeholder will result in duplication warnings and/or messed up values if
470 more than one aggregation function are enabled.
472 The following example calculates the average usage of all "even" CPUs:
474 <Plugin "aggregation">
475 <Aggregation>
476 Plugin "cpu"
477 PluginInstance "/[0,2,4,6,8]$/"
478 Type "cpu"
480 SetPlugin "cpu"
481 SetPluginInstance "even-%{aggregation}"
483 GroupBy "Host"
484 GroupBy "TypeInstance"
486 CalculateAverage true
487 </Aggregation>
488 </Plugin>
490 This will create the files:
492 =over 4
494 =item *
496 foo.example.com/cpu-even-average/cpu-idle
498 =item *
500 foo.example.com/cpu-even-average/cpu-system
502 =item *
504 foo.example.com/cpu-even-average/cpu-user
506 =item *
508 ...
510 =back
512 =item B<CalculateNum> B<true>|B<false>
514 =item B<CalculateSum> B<true>|B<false>
516 =item B<CalculateAverage> B<true>|B<false>
518 =item B<CalculateMinimum> B<true>|B<false>
520 =item B<CalculateMaximum> B<true>|B<false>
522 =item B<CalculateStddev> B<true>|B<false>
524 Boolean options for enabling calculation of the number of value lists, their
525 sum, average, minimum, maximum andE<nbsp>/ or standard deviation. All options
526 are disabled by default.
528 =back
530 =head2 Plugin C<amqp>
532 The I<AMQP plugin> can be used to communicate with other instances of
533 I<collectd> or third party applications using an AMQP message broker. Values
534 are sent to or received from the broker, which handles routing, queueing and
535 possibly filtering out messages.
537 B<Synopsis:>
539 <Plugin "amqp">
540 # Send values to an AMQP broker
541 <Publish "some_name">
542 Host "localhost"
543 Port "5672"
544 VHost "/"
545 User "guest"
546 Password "guest"
547 Exchange "amq.fanout"
548 # ExchangeType "fanout"
549 # RoutingKey "collectd"
550 # Persistent false
551 # ConnectionRetryDelay 0
552 # Format "command"
553 # StoreRates false
554 # GraphitePrefix "collectd."
555 # GraphiteEscapeChar "_"
556 # GraphiteSeparateInstances false
557 # GraphiteAlwaysAppendDS false
558 </Publish>
560 # Receive values from an AMQP broker
561 <Subscribe "some_name">
562 Host "localhost"
563 Port "5672"
564 VHost "/"
565 User "guest"
566 Password "guest"
567 Exchange "amq.fanout"
568 # ExchangeType "fanout"
569 # Queue "queue_name"
570 # QueueDurable false
571 # QueueAutoDelete true
572 # RoutingKey "collectd.#"
573 # ConnectionRetryDelay 0
574 </Subscribe>
575 </Plugin>
577 The plugin's configuration consists of a number of I<Publish> and I<Subscribe>
578 blocks, which configure sending and receiving of values respectively. The two
579 blocks are very similar, so unless otherwise noted, an option can be used in
580 either block. The name given in the blocks starting tag is only used for
581 reporting messages, but may be used to support I<flushing> of certain
582 I<Publish> blocks in the future.
584 =over 4
586 =item B<Host> I<Host>
588 Hostname or IP-address of the AMQP broker. Defaults to the default behavior of
589 the underlying communications library, I<rabbitmq-c>, which is "localhost".
591 =item B<Port> I<Port>
593 Service name or port number on which the AMQP broker accepts connections. This
594 argument must be a string, even if the numeric form is used. Defaults to
595 "5672".
597 =item B<VHost> I<VHost>
599 Name of the I<virtual host> on the AMQP broker to use. Defaults to "/".
601 =item B<User> I<User>
603 =item B<Password> I<Password>
605 Credentials used to authenticate to the AMQP broker. By default "guest"/"guest"
606 is used.
608 =item B<Exchange> I<Exchange>
610 In I<Publish> blocks, this option specifies the I<exchange> to send values to.
611 By default, "amq.fanout" will be used.
613 In I<Subscribe> blocks this option is optional. If given, a I<binding> between
614 the given exchange and the I<queue> is created, using the I<routing key> if
615 configured. See the B<Queue> and B<RoutingKey> options below.
617 =item B<ExchangeType> I<Type>
619 If given, the plugin will try to create the configured I<exchange> with this
620 I<type> after connecting. When in a I<Subscribe> block, the I<queue> will then
621 be bound to this exchange.
623 =item B<Queue> I<Queue> (Subscribe only)
625 Configures the I<queue> name to subscribe to. If no queue name was configured
626 explicitly, a unique queue name will be created by the broker.
628 =item B<QueueDurable> B<true>|B<false> (Subscribe only)
630 Defines if the I<queue> subscribed to is durable (saved to persistent storage)
631 or transient (will disappear if the AMQP broker is restarted). Defaults to
632 "false".
634 This option should be used in conjunction with the I<Persistent> option on the
635 publish side.
637 =item B<QueueAutoDelete> B<true>|B<false> (Subscribe only)
639 Defines if the I<queue> subscribed to will be deleted once the last consumer
640 unsubscribes. Defaults to "true".
642 =item B<RoutingKey> I<Key>
644 In I<Publish> blocks, this configures the routing key to set on all outgoing
645 messages. If not given, the routing key will be computed from the I<identifier>
646 of the value. The host, plugin, type and the two instances are concatenated
647 together using dots as the separator and all containing dots replaced with
648 slashes. For example "collectd.host/example/com.cpu.0.cpu.user". This makes it
649 possible to receive only specific values using a "topic" exchange.
651 In I<Subscribe> blocks, configures the I<routing key> used when creating a
652 I<binding> between an I<exchange> and the I<queue>. The usual wildcards can be
653 used to filter messages when using a "topic" exchange. If you're only
654 interested in CPU statistics, you could use the routing key "collectd.*.cpu.#"
655 for example.
657 =item B<Persistent> B<true>|B<false> (Publish only)
659 Selects the I<delivery method> to use. If set to B<true>, the I<persistent>
660 mode will be used, i.e. delivery is guaranteed. If set to B<false> (the
661 default), the I<transient> delivery mode will be used, i.e. messages may be
662 lost due to high load, overflowing queues or similar issues.
664 =item B<ConnectionRetryDelay> I<Delay>
666 When the connection to the AMQP broker is lost, defines the time in seconds to
667 wait before attempting to reconnect. Defaults to 0, which implies collectd will
668 attempt to reconnect at each read interval (in Subscribe mode) or each time
669 values are ready for submission (in Publish mode).
671 =item B<Format> B<Command>|B<JSON>|B<Graphite> (Publish only)
673 Selects the format in which messages are sent to the broker. If set to
674 B<Command> (the default), values are sent as C<PUTVAL> commands which are
675 identical to the syntax used by the I<Exec> and I<UnixSock plugins>. In this
676 case, the C<Content-Type> header field will be set to C<text/collectd>.
678 If set to B<JSON>, the values are encoded in the I<JavaScript Object Notation>,
679 an easy and straight forward exchange format. The C<Content-Type> header field
680 will be set to C<application/json>.
682 If set to B<Graphite>, values are encoded in the I<Graphite> format, which is
683 "<metric> <value> <timestamp>\n". The C<Content-Type> header field will be set to
684 C<text/graphite>.
686 A subscribing client I<should> use the C<Content-Type> header field to
687 determine how to decode the values. Currently, the I<AMQP plugin> itself can
688 only decode the B<Command> format.
690 =item B<StoreRates> B<true>|B<false> (Publish only)
692 Determines whether or not C<COUNTER>, C<DERIVE> and C<ABSOLUTE> data sources
693 are converted to a I<rate> (i.e. a C<GAUGE> value). If set to B<false> (the
694 default), no conversion is performed. Otherwise the conversion is performed
695 using the internal value cache.
697 Please note that currently this option is only used if the B<Format> option has
698 been set to B<JSON>.
700 =item B<GraphitePrefix> (Publish and B<Format>=I<Graphite> only)
702 A prefix can be added in the metric name when outputting in the I<Graphite> format.
703 It's added before the I<Host> name.
704 Metric name will be "<prefix><host><postfix><plugin><type><name>"
706 =item B<GraphitePostfix> (Publish and B<Format>=I<Graphite> only)
708 A postfix can be added in the metric name when outputting in the I<Graphite> format.
709 It's added after the I<Host> name.
710 Metric name will be "<prefix><host><postfix><plugin><type><name>"
712 =item B<GraphiteEscapeChar> (Publish and B<Format>=I<Graphite> only)
714 Specify a character to replace dots (.) in the host part of the metric name.
715 In I<Graphite> metric name, dots are used as separators between different
716 metric parts (host, plugin, type).
717 Default is "_" (I<Underscore>).
719 =item B<GraphiteSeparateInstances> B<true>|B<false>
721 If set to B<true>, the plugin instance and type instance will be in their own
722 path component, for example C<host.cpu.0.cpu.idle>. If set to B<false> (the
723 default), the plugin and plugin instance (and likewise the type and type
724 instance) are put into one component, for example C<host.cpu-0.cpu-idle>.
726 =item B<GraphiteAlwaysAppendDS> B<true>|B<false>
728 If set to B<true>, append the name of the I<Data Source> (DS) to the "metric"
729 identifier. If set to B<false> (the default), this is only done when there is
730 more than one DS.
732 =back
734 =head2 Plugin C<apache>
736 To configure the C<apache>-plugin you first need to configure the Apache
737 webserver correctly. The Apache-plugin C<mod_status> needs to be loaded and
738 working and the C<ExtendedStatus> directive needs to be B<enabled>. You can use
739 the following snipped to base your Apache config upon:
741 ExtendedStatus on
742 <IfModule mod_status.c>
743 <Location /mod_status>
744 SetHandler server-status
745 </Location>
746 </IfModule>
748 Since its C<mod_status> module is very similar to Apache's, B<lighttpd> is
749 also supported. It introduces a new field, called C<BusyServers>, to count the
750 number of currently connected clients. This field is also supported.
752 The configuration of the I<Apache> plugin consists of one or more
753 C<E<lt>InstanceE<nbsp>/E<gt>> blocks. Each block requires one string argument
754 as the instance name. For example:
756 <Plugin "apache">
757 <Instance "www1">
758 URL "http://www1.example.com/mod_status?auto"
759 </Instance>
760 <Instance "www2">
761 URL "http://www2.example.com/mod_status?auto"
762 </Instance>
763 </Plugin>
765 The instance name will be used as the I<plugin instance>. To emulate the old
766 (versionE<nbsp>4) behavior, you can use an empty string (""). In order for the
767 plugin to work correctly, each instance name must be unique. This is not
768 enforced by the plugin and it is your responsibility to ensure it.
770 The following options are accepted within each I<Instance> block:
772 =over 4
774 =item B<URL> I<http://host/mod_status?auto>
776 Sets the URL of the C<mod_status> output. This needs to be the output generated
777 by C<ExtendedStatus on> and it needs to be the machine readable output
778 generated by appending the C<?auto> argument. This option is I<mandatory>.
780 =item B<User> I<Username>
782 Optional user name needed for authentication.
784 =item B<Password> I<Password>
786 Optional password needed for authentication.
788 =item B<VerifyPeer> B<true|false>
790 Enable or disable peer SSL certificate verification. See
791 L<http://curl.haxx.se/docs/sslcerts.html> for details. Enabled by default.
793 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true|false>
795 Enable or disable peer host name verification. If enabled, the plugin checks
796 if the C<Common Name> or a C<Subject Alternate Name> field of the SSL
797 certificate matches the host name provided by the B<URL> option. If this
798 identity check fails, the connection is aborted. Obviously, only works when
799 connecting to a SSL enabled server. Enabled by default.
801 =item B<CACert> I<File>
803 File that holds one or more SSL certificates. If you want to use HTTPS you will
804 possibly need this option. What CA certificates come bundled with C<libcurl>
805 and are checked by default depends on the distribution you use.
807 =item B<SSLCiphers> I<list of ciphers>
809 Specifies which ciphers to use in the connection. The list of ciphers
810 must specify valid ciphers. See
811 L<http://www.openssl.org/docs/apps/ciphers.html> for details.
813 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
815 The B<Timeout> option sets the overall timeout for HTTP requests to B<URL>, in
816 milliseconds. By default, the configured B<Interval> is used to set the
817 timeout.
819 =back
821 =head2 Plugin C<apcups>
823 =over 4
825 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
827 Hostname of the host running B<apcupsd>. Defaults to B<localhost>. Please note
828 that IPv6 support has been disabled unless someone can confirm or decline that
829 B<apcupsd> can handle it.
831 =item B<Port> I<Port>
833 TCP-Port to connect to. Defaults to B<3551>.
835 =item B<ReportSeconds> B<true>|B<false>
837 If set to B<true>, the time reported in the C<timeleft> metric will be
838 converted to seconds. This is the recommended setting. If set to B<false>, the
839 default for backwards compatibility, the time will be reported in minutes.
841 =item B<PersistentConnection> B<true>|B<false>
843 The plugin is designed to keep the connection to I<apcupsd> open between reads.
844 If plugin poll interval is greater than 15 seconds (hardcoded socket close
845 timeout in I<apcupsd> NIS), then this option is B<false> by default.
847 You can instruct the plugin to close the connection after each read by setting
848 this option to B<false> or force keeping the connection by setting it to B<true>.
850 If I<apcupsd> appears to close the connection due to inactivity quite quickly,
851 the plugin will try to detect this problem and switch to an open-read-close mode.
853 =back
855 =head2 Plugin C<aquaero>
857 This plugin collects the value of the available sensors in an
858 I<AquaeroE<nbsp>5> board. AquaeroE<nbsp>5 is a water-cooling controller board,
859 manufactured by Aqua Computer GmbH L<http://www.aquacomputer.de/>, with a USB2
860 connection for monitoring and configuration. The board can handle multiple
861 temperature sensors, fans, water pumps and water level sensors and adjust the
862 output settings such as fan voltage or power used by the water pump based on
863 the available inputs using a configurable controller included in the board.
864 This plugin collects all the available inputs as well as some of the output
865 values chosen by this controller. The plugin is based on the I<libaquaero5>
866 library provided by I<aquatools-ng>.
868 =over 4
870 =item B<Device> I<DevicePath>
872 Device path of the AquaeroE<nbsp>5's USB HID (human interface device), usually
873 in the form C</dev/usb/hiddevX>. If this option is no set the plugin will try
874 to auto-detect the Aquaero 5 USB device based on vendor-ID and product-ID.
876 =back
878 =head2 Plugin C<ascent>
880 This plugin collects information about an Ascent server, a free server for the
881 "World of Warcraft" game. This plugin gathers the information by fetching the
882 XML status page using C<libcurl> and parses it using C<libxml2>.
884 The configuration options are the same as for the C<apache> plugin above:
886 =over 4
888 =item B<URL> I<http://localhost/ascent/status/>
890 Sets the URL of the XML status output.
892 =item B<User> I<Username>
894 Optional user name needed for authentication.
896 =item B<Password> I<Password>
898 Optional password needed for authentication.
900 =item B<VerifyPeer> B<true|false>
902 Enable or disable peer SSL certificate verification. See
903 L<http://curl.haxx.se/docs/sslcerts.html> for details. Enabled by default.
905 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true|false>
907 Enable or disable peer host name verification. If enabled, the plugin checks
908 if the C<Common Name> or a C<Subject Alternate Name> field of the SSL
909 certificate matches the host name provided by the B<URL> option. If this
910 identity check fails, the connection is aborted. Obviously, only works when
911 connecting to a SSL enabled server. Enabled by default.
913 =item B<CACert> I<File>
915 File that holds one or more SSL certificates. If you want to use HTTPS you will
916 possibly need this option. What CA certificates come bundled with C<libcurl>
917 and are checked by default depends on the distribution you use.
919 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
921 The B<Timeout> option sets the overall timeout for HTTP requests to B<URL>, in
922 milliseconds. By default, the configured B<Interval> is used to set the
923 timeout.
925 =back
927 =head2 Plugin C<barometer>
929 This plugin reads absolute air pressure using digital barometer sensor on a I2C
930 bus. Supported sensors are:
932 =over 5
934 =item I<MPL115A2> from Freescale,
935 see L<http://www.freescale.com/webapp/sps/site/prod_summary.jsp?code=MPL115A>.
938 =item I<MPL3115> from Freescale
939 see L<http://www.freescale.com/webapp/sps/site/prod_summary.jsp?code=MPL3115A2>.
942 =item I<BMP085> from Bosch Sensortec
944 =back
946 The sensor type - one of the above - is detected automatically by the plugin
947 and indicated in the plugin_instance (you will see subdirectory
948 "barometer-mpl115" or "barometer-mpl3115", or "barometer-bmp085"). The order of
949 detection is BMP085 -> MPL3115 -> MPL115A2, the first one found will be used
950 (only one sensor can be used by the plugin).
952 The plugin provides absolute barometric pressure, air pressure reduced to sea
953 level (several possible approximations) and as an auxiliary value also internal
954 sensor temperature. It uses (expects/provides) typical metric units - pressure
955 in [hPa], temperature in [C], altitude in [m].
957 It was developed and tested under Linux only. The only platform dependency is
958 the standard Linux i2c-dev interface (the particular bus driver has to
959 support the SM Bus command subset).
961 The reduction or normalization to mean sea level pressure requires (depending
962 on selected method/approximation) also altitude and reference to temperature
963 sensor(s). When multiple temperature sensors are configured the minimum of
964 their values is always used (expecting that the warmer ones are affected by
965 e.g. direct sun light at that moment).
967 Synopsis:
969 <Plugin "barometer">
970 Device "/dev/i2c-0";
971 Oversampling 512
972 PressureOffset 0.0
973 TemperatureOffset 0.0
974 Normalization 2
975 Altitude 238.0
976 TemperatureSensor "myserver/onewire-F10FCA000800/temperature"
977 </Plugin>
979 =over 4
981 =item B<Device> I<device>
983 The only mandatory configuration parameter.
985 Device name of the I2C bus to which the sensor is connected. Note that
986 typically you need to have loaded the i2c-dev module.
987 Using i2c-tools you can check/list i2c buses available on your system by:
989 i2cdetect -l
991 Then you can scan for devices on given bus. E.g. to scan the whole bus 0 use:
993 i2cdetect -y -a 0
995 This way you should be able to verify that the pressure sensor (either type) is
996 connected and detected on address 0x60.
998 =item B<Oversampling> I<value>
1000 Optional parameter controlling the oversampling/accuracy. Default value
1001 is 1 providing fastest and least accurate reading.
1003 For I<MPL115> this is the size of the averaging window. To filter out sensor
1004 noise a simple averaging using floating window of this configurable size is
1005 used. The plugin will use average of the last C<value> measurements (value of 1
1006 means no averaging). Minimal size is 1, maximal 1024.
1008 For I<MPL3115> this is the oversampling value. The actual oversampling is
1009 performed by the sensor and the higher value the higher accuracy and longer
1010 conversion time (although nothing to worry about in the collectd context).
1011 Supported values are: 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 and 128. Any other value is
1012 adjusted by the plugin to the closest supported one.
1014 For I<BMP085> this is the oversampling value. The actual oversampling is
1015 performed by the sensor and the higher value the higher accuracy and longer
1016 conversion time (although nothing to worry about in the collectd context).
1017 Supported values are: 1, 2, 4, 8. Any other value is adjusted by the plugin to
1018 the closest supported one.
1020 =item B<PressureOffset> I<offset>
1022 Optional parameter for MPL3115 only.
1024 You can further calibrate the sensor by supplying pressure and/or temperature
1025 offsets. This is added to the measured/caclulated value (i.e. if the measured
1026 value is too high then use negative offset).
1027 In hPa, default is 0.0.
1029 =item B<TemperatureOffset> I<offset>
1031 Optional parameter for MPL3115 only.
1033 You can further calibrate the sensor by supplying pressure and/or temperature
1034 offsets. This is added to the measured/caclulated value (i.e. if the measured
1035 value is too high then use negative offset).
1036 In C, default is 0.0.
1038 =item B<Normalization> I<method>
1040 Optional parameter, default value is 0.
1042 Normalization method - what approximation/model is used to compute the mean sea
1043 level pressure from the air absolute pressure.
1045 Supported values of the C<method> (integer between from 0 to 2) are:
1047 =over 5
1049 =item B<0> - no conversion, absolute pressure is simply copied over. For this method you
1050 do not need to configure C<Altitude> or C<TemperatureSensor>.
1052 =item B<1> - international formula for conversion ,
1053 See
1054 L<http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Atmospheric_pressure#Altitude_atmospheric_pressure_variation>.
1055 For this method you have to configure C<Altitude> but do not need
1056 C<TemperatureSensor> (uses fixed global temperature average instead).
1058 =item B<2> - formula as recommended by the Deutsche Wetterdienst (German
1059 Meteorological Service).
1060 See L<http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/Barometrische_H%C3%B6henformel#Theorie>
1061 For this method you have to configure both C<Altitude> and
1062 C<TemperatureSensor>.
1064 =back
1067 =item B<Altitude> I<altitude>
1069 The altitude (in meters) of the location where you meassure the pressure.
1071 =item B<TemperatureSensor> I<reference>
1073 Temperature sensor(s) which should be used as a reference when normalizing the
1074 pressure using C<Normalization> method 2.
1075 When specified more sensors a minimum is found and used each time. The
1076 temperature reading directly from this pressure sensor/plugin is typically not
1077 suitable as the pressure sensor will be probably inside while we want outside
1078 temperature. The collectd reference name is something like
1079 <hostname>/<plugin_name>-<plugin_instance>/<type>-<type_instance>
1080 (<type_instance> is usually omitted when there is just single value type). Or
1081 you can figure it out from the path of the output data files.
1083 =back
1085 =head2 Plugin C<battery>
1087 The I<battery plugin> reports the remaining capacity, power and voltage of
1088 laptop batteries.
1090 =over 4
1092 =item B<ValuesPercentage> B<false>|B<true>
1094 When enabled, remaining capacity is reported as a percentage, e.g. "42%
1095 capacity remaining". Otherwise the capacity is stored as reported by the
1096 battery, most likely in "Wh". This option does not work with all input methods,
1097 in particular when only C</proc/pmu> is available on an old Linux system.
1098 Defaults to B<false>.
1100 =item B<ReportDegraded> B<false>|B<true>
1102 Typical laptop batteries degrade over time, meaning the capacity decreases with
1103 recharge cycles. The maximum charge of the previous charge cycle is tracked as
1104 "last full capacity" and used to determine that a battery is "fully charged".
1106 When this option is set to B<false>, the default, the I<battery plugin> will
1107 only report the remaining capacity. If the B<ValuesPercentage> option is
1108 enabled, the relative remaining capacity is calculated as the ratio of the
1109 "remaining capacity" and the "last full capacity". This is what most tools,
1110 such as the status bar of desktop environments, also do.
1112 When set to B<true>, the battery plugin will report three values: B<charged>
1113 (remaining capacity), B<discharged> (difference between "last full capacity"
1114 and "remaining capacity") and B<degraded> (difference between "design capacity"
1115 and "last full capacity").
1117 =back
1119 =head2 Plugin C<bind>
1121 Starting with BIND 9.5.0, the most widely used DNS server software provides
1122 extensive statistics about queries, responses and lots of other information.
1123 The bind plugin retrieves this information that's encoded in XML and provided
1124 via HTTP and submits the values to collectd.
1126 To use this plugin, you first need to tell BIND to make this information
1127 available. This is done with the C<statistics-channels> configuration option:
1129 statistics-channels {
1130 inet localhost port 8053;
1131 };
1133 The configuration follows the grouping that can be seen when looking at the
1134 data with an XSLT compatible viewer, such as a modern web browser. It's
1135 probably a good idea to make yourself familiar with the provided values, so you
1136 can understand what the collected statistics actually mean.
1138 Synopsis:
1140 <Plugin "bind">
1141 URL "http://localhost:8053/"
1142 ParseTime false
1143 OpCodes true
1144 QTypes true
1146 ServerStats true
1147 ZoneMaintStats true
1148 ResolverStats false
1149 MemoryStats true
1151 <View "_default">
1152 QTypes true
1153 ResolverStats true
1154 CacheRRSets true
1156 Zone "127.in-addr.arpa/IN"
1157 </View>
1158 </Plugin>
1160 The bind plugin accepts the following configuration options:
1162 =over 4
1164 =item B<URL> I<URL>
1166 URL from which to retrieve the XML data. If not specified,
1167 C<http://localhost:8053/> will be used.
1169 =item B<ParseTime> B<true>|B<false>
1171 When set to B<true>, the time provided by BIND will be parsed and used to
1172 dispatch the values. When set to B<false>, the local time source is queried.
1174 This setting is set to B<true> by default for backwards compatibility; setting
1175 this to B<false> is I<recommended> to avoid problems with timezones and
1176 localization.
1178 =item B<OpCodes> B<true>|B<false>
1180 When enabled, statistics about the I<"OpCodes">, for example the number of
1181 C<QUERY> packets, are collected.
1183 Default: Enabled.
1185 =item B<QTypes> B<true>|B<false>
1187 When enabled, the number of I<incoming> queries by query types (for example
1188 C<A>, C<MX>, C<AAAA>) is collected.
1190 Default: Enabled.
1192 =item B<ServerStats> B<true>|B<false>
1194 Collect global server statistics, such as requests received over IPv4 and IPv6,
1195 successful queries, and failed updates.
1197 Default: Enabled.
1199 =item B<ZoneMaintStats> B<true>|B<false>
1201 Collect zone maintenance statistics, mostly information about notifications
1202 (zone updates) and zone transfers.
1204 Default: Enabled.
1206 =item B<ResolverStats> B<true>|B<false>
1208 Collect resolver statistics, i.E<nbsp>e. statistics about outgoing requests
1209 (e.E<nbsp>g. queries over IPv4, lame servers). Since the global resolver
1210 counters apparently were removed in BIND 9.5.1 and 9.6.0, this is disabled by
1211 default. Use the B<ResolverStats> option within a B<View "_default"> block
1212 instead for the same functionality.
1214 Default: Disabled.
1216 =item B<MemoryStats>
1218 Collect global memory statistics.
1220 Default: Enabled.
1222 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
1224 The B<Timeout> option sets the overall timeout for HTTP requests to B<URL>, in
1225 milliseconds. By default, the configured B<Interval> is used to set the
1226 timeout.
1228 =item B<View> I<Name>
1230 Collect statistics about a specific I<"view">. BIND can behave different,
1231 mostly depending on the source IP-address of the request. These different
1232 configurations are called "views". If you don't use this feature, you most
1233 likely are only interested in the C<_default> view.
1235 Within a E<lt>B<View>E<nbsp>I<name>E<gt> block, you can specify which
1236 information you want to collect about a view. If no B<View> block is
1237 configured, no detailed view statistics will be collected.
1239 =over 4
1241 =item B<QTypes> B<true>|B<false>
1243 If enabled, the number of I<outgoing> queries by query type (e.E<nbsp>g. C<A>,
1244 C<MX>) is collected.
1246 Default: Enabled.
1248 =item B<ResolverStats> B<true>|B<false>
1250 Collect resolver statistics, i.E<nbsp>e. statistics about outgoing requests
1251 (e.E<nbsp>g. queries over IPv4, lame servers).
1253 Default: Enabled.
1255 =item B<CacheRRSets> B<true>|B<false>
1257 If enabled, the number of entries (I<"RR sets">) in the view's cache by query
1258 type is collected. Negative entries (queries which resulted in an error, for
1259 example names that do not exist) are reported with a leading exclamation mark,
1260 e.E<nbsp>g. "!A".
1262 Default: Enabled.
1264 =item B<Zone> I<Name>
1266 When given, collect detailed information about the given zone in the view. The
1267 information collected if very similar to the global B<ServerStats> information
1268 (see above).
1270 You can repeat this option to collect detailed information about multiple
1271 zones.
1273 By default no detailed zone information is collected.
1275 =back
1277 =back
1279 =head2 Plugin C<ceph>
1281 The ceph plugin collects values from JSON data to be parsed by B<libyajl>
1282 (L<https://lloyd.github.io/yajl/>) retrieved from ceph daemon admin sockets.
1284 A separate B<Daemon> block must be configured for each ceph daemon to be
1285 monitored. The following example will read daemon statistics from four
1286 separate ceph daemons running on the same device (two OSDs, one MON, one MDS) :
1288 <Plugin ceph>
1289 LongRunAvgLatency false
1290 ConvertSpecialMetricTypes true
1291 <Daemon "osd.0">
1292 SocketPath "/var/run/ceph/ceph-osd.0.asok"
1293 </Daemon>
1294 <Daemon "osd.1">
1295 SocketPath "/var/run/ceph/ceph-osd.1.asok"
1296 </Daemon>
1297 <Daemon "mon.a">
1298 SocketPath "/var/run/ceph/ceph-mon.ceph1.asok"
1299 </Daemon>
1300 <Daemon "mds.a">
1301 SocketPath "/var/run/ceph/ceph-mds.ceph1.asok"
1302 </Daemon>
1303 </Plugin>
1305 The ceph plugin accepts the following configuration options:
1307 =over 4
1309 =item B<LongRunAvgLatency> B<true>|B<false>
1311 If enabled, latency values(sum,count pairs) are calculated as the long run
1312 average - average since the ceph daemon was started = (sum / count).
1313 When disabled, latency values are calculated as the average since the last
1314 collection = (sum_now - sum_last) / (count_now - count_last).
1316 Default: Disabled
1318 =item B<ConvertSpecialMetricTypes> B<true>|B<false>
1320 If enabled, special metrics (metrics that differ in type from similar counters)
1321 are converted to the type of those similar counters. This currently only
1322 applies to filestore.journal_wr_bytes which is a counter for OSD daemons. The
1323 ceph schema reports this metric type as a sum,count pair while similar counters
1324 are treated as derive types. When converted, the sum is used as the counter
1325 value and is treated as a derive type.
1326 When disabled, all metrics are treated as the types received from the ceph schema.
1328 Default: Enabled
1330 =back
1332 Each B<Daemon> block must have a string argument for the plugin instance name.
1333 A B<SocketPath> is also required for each B<Daemon> block:
1335 =over 4
1337 =item B<Daemon> I<DaemonName>
1339 Name to be used as the instance name for this daemon.
1341 =item B<SocketPath> I<SocketPath>
1343 Specifies the path to the UNIX admin socket of the ceph daemon.
1345 =back
1347 =head2 Plugin C<cgroups>
1349 This plugin collects the CPU user/system time for each I<cgroup> by reading the
1350 F<cpuacct.stat> files in the first cpuacct-mountpoint (typically
1351 F</sys/fs/cgroup/cpu.cpuacct> on machines using systemd).
1353 =over 4
1355 =item B<CGroup> I<Directory>
1357 Select I<cgroup> based on the name. Whether only matching I<cgroups> are
1358 collected or if they are ignored is controlled by the B<IgnoreSelected> option;
1359 see below.
1361 =item B<IgnoreSelected> B<true>|B<false>
1363 Invert the selection: If set to true, all cgroups I<except> the ones that
1364 match any one of the criteria are collected. By default only selected
1365 cgroups are collected if a selection is made. If no selection is configured
1366 at all, B<all> cgroups are selected.
1368 =back
1370 =head2 Plugin C<chrony>
1372 The C<chrony> plugin collects ntp data from a B<chronyd> server, such as clock
1373 skew and per-peer stratum.
1375 For talking to B<chronyd>, it mimics what the B<chronyc> control program does
1376 on the wire.
1378 Available configuration options for the C<chrony> plugin:
1380 =over 4
1382 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
1384 Hostname of the host running B<chronyd>. Defaults to B<localhost>.
1386 =item B<Port> I<Port>
1388 UDP-Port to connect to. Defaults to B<323>.
1390 =item B<Timeout> I<Timeout>
1392 Connection timeout in seconds. Defaults to B<2>.
1394 =back
1396 =head2 Plugin C<conntrack>
1398 This plugin collects IP conntrack statistics.
1400 =over 4
1402 =item B<OldFiles>
1404 Assume the B<conntrack_count> and B<conntrack_max> files to be found in
1405 F</proc/sys/net/ipv4/netfilter> instead of F</proc/sys/net/netfilter/>.
1407 =back
1409 =head2 Plugin C<cpu>
1411 The I<CPU plugin> collects CPU usage metrics. By default, CPU usage is reported
1412 as Jiffies, using the C<cpu> type. Two aggregations are available:
1414 =over 4
1416 =item *
1418 Sum, per-state, over all CPUs installed in the system; and
1420 =item *
1422 Sum, per-CPU, over all non-idle states of a CPU, creating an "active" state.
1424 =back
1426 The two aggregations can be combined, leading to I<collectd> only emitting a
1427 single "active" metric for the entire system. As soon as one of these
1428 aggregations (or both) is enabled, the I<cpu plugin> will report a percentage,
1429 rather than Jiffies. In addition, you can request individual, per-state,
1430 per-CPU metrics to be reported as percentage.
1432 The following configuration options are available:
1434 =over 4
1436 =item B<ReportByState> B<true>|B<false>
1438 When set to B<true>, the default, reports per-state metrics, e.g. "system",
1439 "user" and "idle".
1440 When set to B<false>, aggregates (sums) all I<non-idle> states into one
1441 "active" metric.
1443 =item B<ReportByCpu> B<true>|B<false>
1445 When set to B<true>, the default, reports per-CPU (per-core) metrics.
1446 When set to B<false>, instead of reporting metrics for individual CPUs, only a
1447 global sum of CPU states is emitted.
1449 =item B<ValuesPercentage> B<false>|B<true>
1451 This option is only considered when both, B<ReportByCpu> and B<ReportByState>
1452 are set to B<true>. In this case, by default, metrics will be reported as
1453 Jiffies. By setting this option to B<true>, you can request percentage values
1454 in the un-aggregated (per-CPU, per-state) mode as well.
1456 =item B<ReportNumCpu> B<false>|B<true>
1458 When set to B<true>, reports the number of available CPUs.
1459 Defaults to B<false>.
1461 =back
1463 =head2 Plugin C<cpufreq>
1465 This plugin doesn't have any options. It reads
1466 F</sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpufreq/scaling_cur_freq> (for the first CPU
1467 installed) to get the current CPU frequency. If this file does not exist make
1468 sure B<cpufreqd> (L<http://cpufreqd.sourceforge.net/>) or a similar tool is
1469 installed and an "cpu governor" (that's a kernel module) is loaded.
1471 =head2 Plugin C<cpusleep>
1473 This plugin doesn't have any options. It reads CLOCK_BOOTTIME and
1474 CLOCK_MONOTONIC and reports the difference between these clocks. Since
1475 BOOTTIME clock increments while device is suspended and MONOTONIC
1476 clock does not, the derivative of the difference between these clocks
1477 gives the relative amount of time the device has spent in suspend
1478 state. The recorded value is in milliseconds of sleep per seconds of
1479 wall clock.
1481 =head2 Plugin C<csv>
1483 =over 4
1485 =item B<DataDir> I<Directory>
1487 Set the directory to store CSV-files under. Per default CSV-files are generated
1488 beneath the daemon's working directory, i.E<nbsp>e. the B<BaseDir>.
1489 The special strings B<stdout> and B<stderr> can be used to write to the standard
1490 output and standard error channels, respectively. This, of course, only makes
1491 much sense when collectd is running in foreground- or non-daemon-mode.
1493 =item B<StoreRates> B<true|false>
1495 If set to B<true>, convert counter values to rates. If set to B<false> (the
1496 default) counter values are stored as is, i.E<nbsp>e. as an increasing integer
1497 number.
1499 =back
1501 =head2 cURL Statistics
1503 All cURL-based plugins support collection of generic, request-based
1504 statistics. These are disabled by default and can be enabled selectively for
1505 each page or URL queried from the curl, curl_json, or curl_xml plugins. See
1506 the documentation of those plugins for specific information. This section
1507 describes the available metrics that can be configured for each plugin. All
1508 options are disabled by default.
1510 See L<http://curl.haxx.se/libcurl/c/curl_easy_getinfo.html> for more details.
1512 =over 4
1514 =item B<TotalTime> B<true|false>
1516 Total time of the transfer, including name resolving, TCP connect, etc.
1518 =item B<NamelookupTime> B<true|false>
1520 Time it took from the start until name resolving was completed.
1522 =item B<ConnectTime> B<true|false>
1524 Time it took from the start until the connect to the remote host (or proxy)
1525 was completed.
1527 =item B<AppconnectTime> B<true|false>
1529 Time it took from the start until the SSL/SSH connect/handshake to the remote
1530 host was completed.
1532 =item B<PretransferTime> B<true|false>
1534 Time it took from the start until just before the transfer begins.
1536 =item B<StarttransferTime> B<true|false>
1538 Time it took from the start until the first byte was received.
1540 =item B<RedirectTime> B<true|false>
1542 Time it took for all redirection steps include name lookup, connect,
1543 pre-transfer and transfer before final transaction was started.
1545 =item B<RedirectCount> B<true|false>
1547 The total number of redirections that were actually followed.
1549 =item B<SizeUpload> B<true|false>
1551 The total amount of bytes that were uploaded.
1553 =item B<SizeDownload> B<true|false>
1555 The total amount of bytes that were downloaded.
1557 =item B<SpeedDownload> B<true|false>
1559 The average download speed that curl measured for the complete download.
1561 =item B<SpeedUpload> B<true|false>
1563 The average upload speed that curl measured for the complete upload.
1565 =item B<HeaderSize> B<true|false>
1567 The total size of all the headers received.
1569 =item B<RequestSize> B<true|false>
1571 The total size of the issued requests.
1573 =item B<ContentLengthDownload> B<true|false>
1575 The content-length of the download.
1577 =item B<ContentLengthUpload> B<true|false>
1579 The specified size of the upload.
1581 =item B<NumConnects> B<true|false>
1583 The number of new connections that were created to achieve the transfer.
1585 =back
1587 =head2 Plugin C<curl>
1589 The curl plugin uses the B<libcurl> (L<http://curl.haxx.se/>) to read web pages
1590 and the match infrastructure (the same code used by the tail plugin) to use
1591 regular expressions with the received data.
1593 The following example will read the current value of AMD stock from Google's
1594 finance page and dispatch the value to collectd.
1596 <Plugin curl>
1597 <Page "stock_quotes">
1598 URL "http://finance.google.com/finance?q=NYSE%3AAMD"
1599 User "foo"
1600 Password "bar"
1601 Digest false
1602 VerifyPeer true
1603 VerifyHost true
1604 CACert "/path/to/ca.crt"
1605 Header "X-Custom-Header: foobar"
1606 Post "foo=bar"
1608 MeasureResponseTime false
1609 MeasureResponseCode false
1611 <Match>
1612 Regex "<span +class=\"pr\"[^>]*> *([0-9]*\\.[0-9]+) *</span>"
1613 DSType "GaugeAverage"
1614 # Note: `stock_value' is not a standard type.
1615 Type "stock_value"
1616 Instance "AMD"
1617 </Match>
1618 </Page>
1619 </Plugin>
1621 In the B<Plugin> block, there may be one or more B<Page> blocks, each defining
1622 a web page and one or more "matches" to be performed on the returned data. The
1623 string argument to the B<Page> block is used as plugin instance.
1625 The following options are valid within B<Page> blocks:
1627 =over 4
1629 =item B<URL> I<URL>
1631 URL of the web site to retrieve. Since a regular expression will be used to
1632 extract information from this data, non-binary data is a big plus here ;)
1634 =item B<User> I<Name>
1636 Username to use if authorization is required to read the page.
1638 =item B<Password> I<Password>
1640 Password to use if authorization is required to read the page.
1642 =item B<Digest> B<true>|B<false>
1644 Enable HTTP digest authentication.
1646 =item B<VerifyPeer> B<true>|B<false>
1648 Enable or disable peer SSL certificate verification. See
1649 L<http://curl.haxx.se/docs/sslcerts.html> for details. Enabled by default.
1651 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true>|B<false>
1653 Enable or disable peer host name verification. If enabled, the plugin checks if
1654 the C<Common Name> or a C<Subject Alternate Name> field of the SSL certificate
1655 matches the host name provided by the B<URL> option. If this identity check
1656 fails, the connection is aborted. Obviously, only works when connecting to a
1657 SSL enabled server. Enabled by default.
1659 =item B<CACert> I<file>
1661 File that holds one or more SSL certificates. If you want to use HTTPS you will
1662 possibly need this option. What CA certificates come bundled with C<libcurl>
1663 and are checked by default depends on the distribution you use.
1665 =item B<Header> I<Header>
1667 A HTTP header to add to the request. Multiple headers are added if this option
1668 is specified more than once.
1670 =item B<Post> I<Body>
1672 Specifies that the HTTP operation should be a POST instead of a GET. The
1673 complete data to be posted is given as the argument. This option will usually
1674 need to be accompanied by a B<Header> option to set an appropriate
1675 C<Content-Type> for the post body (e.g. to
1676 C<application/x-www-form-urlencoded>).
1678 =item B<MeasureResponseTime> B<true>|B<false>
1680 Measure response time for the request. If this setting is enabled, B<Match>
1681 blocks (see below) are optional. Disabled by default.
1683 Beware that requests will get aborted if they take too long to complete. Adjust
1684 B<Timeout> accordingly if you expect B<MeasureResponseTime> to report such slow
1685 requests.
1687 This option is similar to enabling the B<TotalTime> statistic but it's
1688 measured by collectd instead of cURL.
1690 =item B<MeasureResponseCode> B<true>|B<false>
1692 Measure response code for the request. If this setting is enabled, B<Match>
1693 blocks (see below) are optional. Disabled by default.
1695 =item B<E<lt>StatisticsE<gt>>
1697 One B<Statistics> block can be used to specify cURL statistics to be collected
1698 for each request to the remote web site. See the section "cURL Statistics"
1699 above for details. If this setting is enabled, B<Match> blocks (see below) are
1700 optional.
1702 =item B<E<lt>MatchE<gt>>
1704 One or more B<Match> blocks that define how to match information in the data
1705 returned by C<libcurl>. The C<curl> plugin uses the same infrastructure that's
1706 used by the C<tail> plugin, so please see the documentation of the C<tail>
1707 plugin below on how matches are defined. If the B<MeasureResponseTime> or
1708 B<MeasureResponseCode> options are set to B<true>, B<Match> blocks are
1709 optional.
1711 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
1713 The B<Timeout> option sets the overall timeout for HTTP requests to B<URL>, in
1714 milliseconds. By default, the configured B<Interval> is used to set the
1715 timeout. Prior to version 5.5.0, there was no timeout and requests could hang
1716 indefinitely. This legacy behaviour can be achieved by setting the value of
1717 B<Timeout> to 0.
1719 If B<Timeout> is 0 or bigger than the B<Interval>, keep in mind that each slow
1720 network connection will stall one read thread. Adjust the B<ReadThreads> global
1721 setting accordingly to prevent this from blocking other plugins.
1723 =back
1725 =head2 Plugin C<curl_json>
1727 The B<curl_json plugin> collects values from JSON data to be parsed by
1728 B<libyajl> (L<https://lloyd.github.io/yajl/>) retrieved via
1729 either B<libcurl> (L<http://curl.haxx.se/>) or read directly from a
1730 unix socket. The former can be used, for example, to collect values
1731 from CouchDB documents (which are stored JSON notation), and the
1732 latter to collect values from a uWSGI stats socket.
1734 The following example will collect several values from the built-in
1735 C<_stats> runtime statistics module of I<CouchDB>
1736 (L<http://wiki.apache.org/couchdb/Runtime_Statistics>).
1738 <Plugin curl_json>
1739 <URL "http://localhost:5984/_stats">
1740 Instance "httpd"
1741 <Key "httpd/requests/count">
1742 Type "http_requests"
1743 </Key>
1745 <Key "httpd_request_methods/*/count">
1746 Type "http_request_methods"
1747 </Key>
1749 <Key "httpd_status_codes/*/count">
1750 Type "http_response_codes"
1751 </Key>
1752 </URL>
1753 </Plugin>
1755 This example will collect data directly from a I<uWSGI> "Stats Server" socket.
1757 <Plugin curl_json>
1758 <Sock "/var/run/uwsgi.stats.sock">
1759 Instance "uwsgi"
1760 <Key "workers/*/requests">
1761 Type "http_requests"
1762 </Key>
1764 <Key "workers/*/apps/*/requests">
1765 Type "http_requests"
1766 </Key>
1767 </Sock>
1768 </Plugin>
1770 In the B<Plugin> block, there may be one or more B<URL> blocks, each
1771 defining a URL to be fetched via HTTP (using libcurl) or B<Sock>
1772 blocks defining a unix socket to read JSON from directly. Each of
1773 these blocks may have one or more B<Key> blocks.
1775 The B<Key> string argument must be in a path format. Each component is
1776 used to match the key from a JSON map or the index of an JSON
1777 array. If a path component of a B<Key> is a I<*>E<nbsp>wildcard, the
1778 values for all map keys or array indices will be collectd.
1780 The following options are valid within B<URL> blocks:
1782 =over 4
1784 =item B<Host> I<Name>
1786 Use I<Name> as the host name when submitting values. Defaults to the global
1787 host name setting.
1789 =item B<Instance> I<Instance>
1791 Sets the plugin instance to I<Instance>.
1793 =item B<Interval> I<Interval>
1795 Sets the interval (in seconds) in which the values will be collected from this
1796 URL. By default the global B<Interval> setting will be used.
1798 =item B<User> I<Name>
1800 =item B<Password> I<Password>
1802 =item B<Digest> B<true>|B<false>
1804 =item B<VerifyPeer> B<true>|B<false>
1806 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true>|B<false>
1808 =item B<CACert> I<file>
1810 =item B<Header> I<Header>
1812 =item B<Post> I<Body>
1814 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
1816 These options behave exactly equivalent to the appropriate options of the
1817 I<cURL> plugin. Please see there for a detailed description.
1819 =item B<E<lt>StatisticsE<gt>>
1821 One B<Statistics> block can be used to specify cURL statistics to be collected
1822 for each request to the remote URL. See the section "cURL Statistics" above
1823 for details.
1825 =back
1827 The following options are valid within B<Key> blocks:
1829 =over 4
1831 =item B<Type> I<Type>
1833 Sets the type used to dispatch the values to the daemon. Detailed information
1834 about types and their configuration can be found in L<types.db(5)>. This
1835 option is mandatory.
1837 =item B<Instance> I<Instance>
1839 Type-instance to use. Defaults to the current map key or current string array element value.
1841 =back
1843 =head2 Plugin C<curl_xml>
1845 The B<curl_xml plugin> uses B<libcurl> (L<http://curl.haxx.se/>) and B<libxml2>
1846 (L<http://xmlsoft.org/>) to retrieve XML data via cURL.
1848 <Plugin "curl_xml">
1849 <URL "http://localhost/stats.xml">
1850 Host "my_host"
1851 Instance "some_instance"
1852 User "collectd"
1853 Password "thaiNg0I"
1854 VerifyPeer true
1855 VerifyHost true
1856 CACert "/path/to/ca.crt"
1857 Header "X-Custom-Header: foobar"
1858 Post "foo=bar"
1860 <XPath "table[@id=\"magic_level\"]/tr">
1861 Type "magic_level"
1862 #InstancePrefix "prefix-"
1863 InstanceFrom "td[1]"
1864 ValuesFrom "td[2]/span[@class=\"level\"]"
1865 </XPath>
1866 </URL>
1867 </Plugin>
1869 In the B<Plugin> block, there may be one or more B<URL> blocks, each defining a
1870 URL to be fetched using libcurl. Within each B<URL> block there are
1871 options which specify the connection parameters, for example authentication
1872 information, and one or more B<XPath> blocks.
1874 Each B<XPath> block specifies how to get one type of information. The
1875 string argument must be a valid XPath expression which returns a list
1876 of "base elements". One value is dispatched for each "base element". The
1877 I<type instance> and values are looked up using further I<XPath> expressions
1878 that should be relative to the base element.
1880 Within the B<URL> block the following options are accepted:
1882 =over 4
1884 =item B<Host> I<Name>
1886 Use I<Name> as the host name when submitting values. Defaults to the global
1887 host name setting.
1889 =item B<Instance> I<Instance>
1891 Use I<Instance> as the plugin instance when submitting values. Defaults to an
1892 empty string (no plugin instance).
1894 =item B<Namespace> I<Prefix> I<URL>
1896 If an XPath expression references namespaces, they must be specified
1897 with this option. I<Prefix> is the "namespace prefix" used in the XML document.
1898 I<URL> is the "namespace name", an URI reference uniquely identifying the
1899 namespace. The option can be repeated to register multiple namespaces.
1901 Examples:
1903 Namespace "s" "http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/soap/envelope/"
1904 Namespace "m" "http://www.w3.org/1998/Math/MathML"
1906 =item B<User> I<User>
1908 =item B<Password> I<Password>
1910 =item B<Digest> B<true>|B<false>
1912 =item B<VerifyPeer> B<true>|B<false>
1914 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true>|B<false>
1916 =item B<CACert> I<CA Cert File>
1918 =item B<Header> I<Header>
1920 =item B<Post> I<Body>
1922 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
1924 These options behave exactly equivalent to the appropriate options of the
1925 I<cURL plugin>. Please see there for a detailed description.
1927 =item B<E<lt>StatisticsE<gt>>
1929 One B<Statistics> block can be used to specify cURL statistics to be collected
1930 for each request to the remote URL. See the section "cURL Statistics" above
1931 for details.
1933 =item E<lt>B<XPath> I<XPath-expression>E<gt>
1935 Within each B<URL> block, there must be one or more B<XPath> blocks. Each
1936 B<XPath> block specifies how to get one type of information. The string
1937 argument must be a valid XPath expression which returns a list of "base
1938 elements". One value is dispatched for each "base element".
1940 Within the B<XPath> block the following options are accepted:
1942 =over 4
1944 =item B<Type> I<Type>
1946 Specifies the I<Type> used for submitting patches. This determines the number
1947 of values that are required / expected and whether the strings are parsed as
1948 signed or unsigned integer or as double values. See L<types.db(5)> for details.
1949 This option is required.
1951 =item B<InstancePrefix> I<InstancePrefix>
1953 Prefix the I<type instance> with I<InstancePrefix>. The values are simply
1954 concatenated together without any separator.
1955 This option is optional.
1957 =item B<InstanceFrom> I<InstanceFrom>
1959 Specifies a XPath expression to use for determining the I<type instance>. The
1960 XPath expression must return exactly one element. The element's value is then
1961 used as I<type instance>, possibly prefixed with I<InstancePrefix> (see above).
1963 This value is required. As a special exception, if the "base XPath expression"
1964 (the argument to the B<XPath> block) returns exactly one argument, then this
1965 option may be omitted.
1967 =item B<ValuesFrom> I<ValuesFrom> [I<ValuesFrom> ...]
1969 Specifies one or more XPath expression to use for reading the values. The
1970 number of XPath expressions must match the number of data sources in the
1971 I<type> specified with B<Type> (see above). Each XPath expression must return
1972 exactly one element. The element's value is then parsed as a number and used as
1973 value for the appropriate value in the value list dispatched to the daemon.
1975 =back
1977 =back
1979 =head2 Plugin C<dbi>
1981 This plugin uses the B<dbi> library (L<http://libdbi.sourceforge.net/>) to
1982 connect to various databases, execute I<SQL> statements and read back the
1983 results. I<dbi> is an acronym for "database interface" in case you were
1984 wondering about the name. You can configure how each column is to be
1985 interpreted and the plugin will generate one or more data sets from each row
1986 returned according to these rules.
1988 Because the plugin is very generic, the configuration is a little more complex
1989 than those of other plugins. It usually looks something like this:
1991 <Plugin dbi>
1992 <Query "out_of_stock">
1993 Statement "SELECT category, COUNT(*) AS value FROM products WHERE in_stock = 0 GROUP BY category"
1994 # Use with MySQL 5.0.0 or later
1995 MinVersion 50000
1996 <Result>
1997 Type "gauge"
1998 InstancePrefix "out_of_stock"
1999 InstancesFrom "category"
2000 ValuesFrom "value"
2001 </Result>
2002 </Query>
2003 <Database "product_information">
2004 Driver "mysql"
2005 Interval 120
2006 DriverOption "host" "localhost"
2007 DriverOption "username" "collectd"
2008 DriverOption "password" "aZo6daiw"
2009 DriverOption "dbname" "prod_info"
2010 SelectDB "prod_info"
2011 Query "out_of_stock"
2012 </Database>
2013 </Plugin>
2015 The configuration above defines one query with one result and one database. The
2016 query is then linked to the database with the B<Query> option I<within> the
2017 B<E<lt>DatabaseE<gt>> block. You can have any number of queries and databases
2018 and you can also use the B<Include> statement to split up the configuration
2019 file in multiple, smaller files. However, the B<E<lt>QueryE<gt>> block I<must>
2020 precede the B<E<lt>DatabaseE<gt>> blocks, because the file is interpreted from
2021 top to bottom!
2023 The following is a complete list of options:
2025 =head3 B<Query> blocks
2027 Query blocks define I<SQL> statements and how the returned data should be
2028 interpreted. They are identified by the name that is given in the opening line
2029 of the block. Thus the name needs to be unique. Other than that, the name is
2030 not used in collectd.
2032 In each B<Query> block, there is one or more B<Result> blocks. B<Result> blocks
2033 define which column holds which value or instance information. You can use
2034 multiple B<Result> blocks to create multiple values from one returned row. This
2035 is especially useful, when queries take a long time and sending almost the same
2036 query again and again is not desirable.
2038 Example:
2040 <Query "environment">
2041 Statement "select station, temperature, humidity from environment"
2042 <Result>
2043 Type "temperature"
2044 # InstancePrefix "foo"
2045 InstancesFrom "station"
2046 ValuesFrom "temperature"
2047 </Result>
2048 <Result>
2049 Type "humidity"
2050 InstancesFrom "station"
2051 ValuesFrom "humidity"
2052 </Result>
2053 </Query>
2055 The following options are accepted:
2057 =over 4
2059 =item B<Statement> I<SQL>
2061 Sets the statement that should be executed on the server. This is B<not>
2062 interpreted by collectd, but simply passed to the database server. Therefore,
2063 the SQL dialect that's used depends on the server collectd is connected to.
2065 The query has to return at least two columns, one for the instance and one
2066 value. You cannot omit the instance, even if the statement is guaranteed to
2067 always return exactly one line. In that case, you can usually specify something
2068 like this:
2070 Statement "SELECT \"instance\", COUNT(*) AS value FROM table"
2072 (That works with MySQL but may not be valid SQL according to the spec. If you
2073 use a more strict database server, you may have to select from a dummy table or
2074 something.)
2076 Please note that some databases, for example B<Oracle>, will fail if you
2077 include a semicolon at the end of the statement.
2079 =item B<MinVersion> I<Version>
2081 =item B<MaxVersion> I<Value>
2083 Only use this query for the specified database version. You can use these
2084 options to provide multiple queries with the same name but with a slightly
2085 different syntax. The plugin will use only those queries, where the specified
2086 minimum and maximum versions fit the version of the database in use.
2088 The database version is determined by C<dbi_conn_get_engine_version>, see the
2089 L<libdbi documentation|http://libdbi.sourceforge.net/docs/programmers-guide/reference-conn.html#DBI-CONN-GET-ENGINE-VERSION>
2090 for details. Basically, each part of the version is assumed to be in the range
2091 from B<00> to B<99> and all dots are removed. So version "4.1.2" becomes
2092 "40102", version "5.0.42" becomes "50042".
2094 B<Warning:> The plugin will use B<all> matching queries, so if you specify
2095 multiple queries with the same name and B<overlapping> ranges, weird stuff will
2096 happen. Don't to it! A valid example would be something along these lines:
2098 MinVersion 40000
2099 MaxVersion 49999
2100 ...
2101 MinVersion 50000
2102 MaxVersion 50099
2103 ...
2104 MinVersion 50100
2105 # No maximum
2107 In the above example, there are three ranges that don't overlap. The last one
2108 goes from version "5.1.0" to infinity, meaning "all later versions". Versions
2109 before "4.0.0" are not specified.
2111 =item B<Type> I<Type>
2113 The B<type> that's used for each line returned. See L<types.db(5)> for more
2114 details on how types are defined. In short: A type is a predefined layout of
2115 data and the number of values and type of values has to match the type
2116 definition.
2118 If you specify "temperature" here, you need exactly one gauge column. If you
2119 specify "if_octets", you will need two counter columns. See the B<ValuesFrom>
2120 setting below.
2122 There must be exactly one B<Type> option inside each B<Result> block.
2124 =item B<InstancePrefix> I<prefix>
2126 Prepends I<prefix> to the type instance. If B<InstancesFrom> (see below) is not
2127 given, the string is simply copied. If B<InstancesFrom> is given, I<prefix> and
2128 all strings returned in the appropriate columns are concatenated together,
2129 separated by dashes I<("-")>.
2131 =item B<InstancesFrom> I<column0> [I<column1> ...]
2133 Specifies the columns whose values will be used to create the "type-instance"
2134 for each row. If you specify more than one column, the value of all columns
2135 will be joined together with dashes I<("-")> as separation characters.
2137 The plugin itself does not check whether or not all built instances are
2138 different. It's your responsibility to assure that each is unique. This is
2139 especially true, if you do not specify B<InstancesFrom>: B<You> have to make
2140 sure that only one row is returned in this case.
2142 If neither B<InstancePrefix> nor B<InstancesFrom> is given, the type-instance
2143 will be empty.
2145 =item B<ValuesFrom> I<column0> [I<column1> ...]
2147 Names the columns whose content is used as the actual data for the data sets
2148 that are dispatched to the daemon. How many such columns you need is determined
2149 by the B<Type> setting above. If you specify too many or not enough columns,
2150 the plugin will complain about that and no data will be submitted to the
2151 daemon.
2153 The actual data type in the columns is not that important. The plugin will
2154 automatically cast the values to the right type if it know how to do that. So
2155 it should be able to handle integer an floating point types, as well as strings
2156 (if they include a number at the beginning).
2158 There must be at least one B<ValuesFrom> option inside each B<Result> block.
2160 =item B<MetadataFrom> [I<column0> I<column1> ...]
2162 Names the columns whose content is used as metadata for the data sets
2163 that are dispatched to the daemon.
2165 The actual data type in the columns is not that important. The plugin will
2166 automatically cast the values to the right type if it know how to do that. So
2167 it should be able to handle integer an floating point types, as well as strings
2168 (if they include a number at the beginning).
2170 =back
2172 =head3 B<Database> blocks
2174 Database blocks define a connection to a database and which queries should be
2175 sent to that database. Since the used "dbi" library can handle a wide variety
2176 of databases, the configuration is very generic. If in doubt, refer to libdbi's
2177 documentationE<nbsp>- we stick as close to the terminology used there.
2179 Each database needs a "name" as string argument in the starting tag of the
2180 block. This name will be used as "PluginInstance" in the values submitted to
2181 the daemon. Other than that, that name is not used.
2183 =over 4
2185 =item B<Interval> I<Interval>
2187 Sets the interval (in seconds) in which the values will be collected from this
2188 database. By default the global B<Interval> setting will be used.
2190 =item B<Driver> I<Driver>
2192 Specifies the driver to use to connect to the database. In many cases those
2193 drivers are named after the database they can connect to, but this is not a
2194 technical necessity. These drivers are sometimes referred to as "DBD",
2195 B<D>ataB<B>ase B<D>river, and some distributions ship them in separate
2196 packages. Drivers for the "dbi" library are developed by the B<libdbi-drivers>
2197 project at L<http://libdbi-drivers.sourceforge.net/>.
2199 You need to give the driver name as expected by the "dbi" library here. You
2200 should be able to find that in the documentation for each driver. If you
2201 mistype the driver name, the plugin will dump a list of all known driver names
2202 to the log.
2204 =item B<DriverOption> I<Key> I<Value>
2206 Sets driver-specific options. What option a driver supports can be found in the
2207 documentation for each driver, somewhere at
2208 L<http://libdbi-drivers.sourceforge.net/>. However, the options "host",
2209 "username", "password", and "dbname" seem to be deE<nbsp>facto standards.
2211 DBDs can register two types of options: String options and numeric options. The
2212 plugin will use the C<dbi_conn_set_option> function when the configuration
2213 provides a string and the C<dbi_conn_require_option_numeric> function when the
2214 configuration provides a number. So these two lines will actually result in
2215 different calls being used:
2217 DriverOption "Port" 1234 # numeric
2218 DriverOption "Port" "1234" # string
2220 Unfortunately, drivers are not too keen to report errors when an unknown option
2221 is passed to them, so invalid settings here may go unnoticed. This is not the
2222 plugin's fault, it will report errors if it gets them from the libraryE<nbsp>/
2223 the driver. If a driver complains about an option, the plugin will dump a
2224 complete list of all options understood by that driver to the log. There is no
2225 way to programmatically find out if an option expects a string or a numeric
2226 argument, so you will have to refer to the appropriate DBD's documentation to
2227 find this out. Sorry.
2229 =item B<SelectDB> I<Database>
2231 In some cases, the database name you connect with is not the database name you
2232 want to use for querying data. If this option is set, the plugin will "select"
2233 (switch to) that database after the connection is established.
2235 =item B<Query> I<QueryName>
2237 Associates the query named I<QueryName> with this database connection. The
2238 query needs to be defined I<before> this statement, i.E<nbsp>e. all query
2239 blocks you want to refer to must be placed above the database block you want to
2240 refer to them from.
2242 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
2244 Sets the B<host> field of I<value lists> to I<Hostname> when dispatching
2245 values. Defaults to the global hostname setting.
2247 =back
2249 =head2 Plugin C<df>
2251 =over 4
2253 =item B<Device> I<Device>
2255 Select partitions based on the devicename.
2257 =item B<MountPoint> I<Directory>
2259 Select partitions based on the mountpoint.
2261 =item B<FSType> I<FSType>
2263 Select partitions based on the filesystem type.
2265 =item B<IgnoreSelected> B<true>|B<false>
2267 Invert the selection: If set to true, all partitions B<except> the ones that
2268 match any one of the criteria are collected. By default only selected
2269 partitions are collected if a selection is made. If no selection is configured
2270 at all, B<all> partitions are selected.
2272 =item B<ReportByDevice> B<true>|B<false>
2274 Report using the device name rather than the mountpoint. i.e. with this I<false>,
2275 (the default), it will report a disk as "root", but with it I<true>, it will be
2276 "sda1" (or whichever).
2278 =item B<ReportInodes> B<true>|B<false>
2280 Enables or disables reporting of free, reserved and used inodes. Defaults to
2281 inode collection being disabled.
2283 Enable this option if inodes are a scarce resource for you, usually because
2284 many small files are stored on the disk. This is a usual scenario for mail
2285 transfer agents and web caches.
2287 =item B<ValuesAbsolute> B<true>|B<false>
2289 Enables or disables reporting of free and used disk space in 1K-blocks.
2290 Defaults to B<true>.
2292 =item B<ValuesPercentage> B<false>|B<true>
2294 Enables or disables reporting of free and used disk space in percentage.
2295 Defaults to B<false>.
2297 This is useful for deploying I<collectd> on the cloud, where machines with
2298 different disk size may exist. Then it is more practical to configure
2299 thresholds based on relative disk size.
2301 =back
2303 =head2 Plugin C<disk>
2305 The C<disk> plugin collects information about the usage of physical disks and
2306 logical disks (partitions). Values collected are the number of octets written
2307 to and read from a disk or partition, the number of read/write operations
2308 issued to the disk and a rather complex "time" it took for these commands to be
2309 issued.
2311 Using the following two options you can ignore some disks or configure the
2312 collection only of specific disks.
2314 =over 4
2316 =item B<Disk> I<Name>
2318 Select the disk I<Name>. Whether it is collected or ignored depends on the
2319 B<IgnoreSelected> setting, see below. As with other plugins that use the
2320 daemon's ignorelist functionality, a string that starts and ends with a slash
2321 is interpreted as a regular expression. Examples:
2323 Disk "sdd"
2324 Disk "/hda[34]/"
2326 =item B<IgnoreSelected> B<true>|B<false>
2328 Sets whether selected disks, i.E<nbsp>e. the ones matches by any of the B<Disk>
2329 statements, are ignored or if all other disks are ignored. The behavior
2330 (hopefully) is intuitive: If no B<Disk> option is configured, all disks are
2331 collected. If at least one B<Disk> option is given and no B<IgnoreSelected> or
2332 set to B<false>, B<only> matching disks will be collected. If B<IgnoreSelected>
2333 is set to B<true>, all disks are collected B<except> the ones matched.
2335 =item B<UseBSDName> B<true>|B<false>
2337 Whether to use the device's "BSD Name", on MacE<nbsp>OSE<nbsp>X, instead of the
2338 default major/minor numbers. Requires collectd to be built with Apple's
2339 IOKitLib support.
2341 =item B<UdevNameAttr> I<Attribute>
2343 Attempt to override disk instance name with the value of a specified udev
2344 attribute when built with B<libudev>. If the attribute is not defined for the
2345 given device, the default name is used. Example:
2347 UdevNameAttr "DM_NAME"
2349 =back
2351 =head2 Plugin C<dns>
2353 =over 4
2355 =item B<Interface> I<Interface>
2357 The dns plugin uses B<libpcap> to capture dns traffic and analyzes it. This
2358 option sets the interface that should be used. If this option is not set, or
2359 set to "any", the plugin will try to get packets from B<all> interfaces. This
2360 may not work on certain platforms, such as MacE<nbsp>OSE<nbsp>X.
2362 =item B<IgnoreSource> I<IP-address>
2364 Ignore packets that originate from this address.
2366 =item B<SelectNumericQueryTypes> B<true>|B<false>
2368 Enabled by default, collects unknown (and thus presented as numeric only) query types.
2370 =back
2372 =head2 Plugin C<email>
2374 =over 4
2376 =item B<SocketFile> I<Path>
2378 Sets the socket-file which is to be created.
2380 =item B<SocketGroup> I<Group>
2382 If running as root change the group of the UNIX-socket after it has been
2383 created. Defaults to B<collectd>.
2385 =item B<SocketPerms> I<Permissions>
2387 Change the file permissions of the UNIX-socket after it has been created. The
2388 permissions must be given as a numeric, octal value as you would pass to
2389 L<chmod(1)>. Defaults to B<0770>.
2391 =item B<MaxConns> I<Number>
2393 Sets the maximum number of connections that can be handled in parallel. Since
2394 this many threads will be started immediately setting this to a very high
2395 value will waste valuable resources. Defaults to B<5> and will be forced to be
2396 at most B<16384> to prevent typos and dumb mistakes.
2398 =back
2400 =head2 Plugin C<ethstat>
2402 The I<ethstat plugin> collects information about network interface cards (NICs)
2403 by talking directly with the underlying kernel driver using L<ioctl(2)>.
2405 B<Synopsis:>
2407 <Plugin "ethstat">
2408 Interface "eth0"
2409 Map "rx_csum_offload_errors" "if_rx_errors" "checksum_offload"
2410 Map "multicast" "if_multicast"
2411 </Plugin>
2413 B<Options:>
2415 =over 4
2417 =item B<Interface> I<Name>
2419 Collect statistical information about interface I<Name>.
2421 =item B<Map> I<Name> I<Type> [I<TypeInstance>]
2423 By default, the plugin will submit values as type C<derive> and I<type
2424 instance> set to I<Name>, the name of the metric as reported by the driver. If
2425 an appropriate B<Map> option exists, the given I<Type> and, optionally,
2426 I<TypeInstance> will be used.
2428 =item B<MappedOnly> B<true>|B<false>
2430 When set to B<true>, only metrics that can be mapped to a I<type> will be
2431 collected, all other metrics will be ignored. Defaults to B<false>.
2433 =back
2435 =head2 Plugin C<exec>
2437 Please make sure to read L<collectd-exec(5)> before using this plugin. It
2438 contains valuable information on when the executable is executed and the
2439 output that is expected from it.
2441 =over 4
2443 =item B<Exec> I<User>[:[I<Group>]] I<Executable> [I<E<lt>argE<gt>> [I<E<lt>argE<gt>> ...]]
2445 =item B<NotificationExec> I<User>[:[I<Group>]] I<Executable> [I<E<lt>argE<gt>> [I<E<lt>argE<gt>> ...]]
2447 Execute the executable I<Executable> as user I<User>. If the user name is
2448 followed by a colon and a group name, the effective group is set to that group.
2449 The real group and saved-set group will be set to the default group of that
2450 user. If no group is given the effective group ID will be the same as the real
2451 group ID.
2453 Please note that in order to change the user and/or group the daemon needs
2454 superuser privileges. If the daemon is run as an unprivileged user you must
2455 specify the same user/group here. If the daemon is run with superuser
2456 privileges, you must supply a non-root user here.
2458 The executable may be followed by optional arguments that are passed to the
2459 program. Please note that due to the configuration parsing numbers and boolean
2460 values may be changed. If you want to be absolutely sure that something is
2461 passed as-is please enclose it in quotes.
2463 The B<Exec> and B<NotificationExec> statements change the semantics of the
2464 programs executed, i.E<nbsp>e. the data passed to them and the response
2465 expected from them. This is documented in great detail in L<collectd-exec(5)>.
2467 =back
2469 =head2 Plugin C<fhcount>
2471 The C<fhcount> plugin provides statistics about used, unused and total number of
2472 file handles on Linux.
2474 The I<fhcount plugin> provides the following configuration options:
2476 =over 4
2478 =item B<ValuesAbsolute> B<true>|B<false>
2480 Enables or disables reporting of file handles usage in absolute numbers,
2481 e.g. file handles used. Defaults to B<true>.
2483 =item B<ValuesPercentage> B<false>|B<true>
2485 Enables or disables reporting of file handles usage in percentages, e.g.
2486 percent of file handles used. Defaults to B<false>.
2488 =back
2490 =head2 Plugin C<filecount>
2492 The C<filecount> plugin counts the number of files in a certain directory (and
2493 its subdirectories) and their combined size. The configuration is very straight
2494 forward:
2496 <Plugin "filecount">
2497 <Directory "/var/qmail/queue/mess">
2498 Instance "qmail-message"
2499 </Directory>
2500 <Directory "/var/qmail/queue/todo">
2501 Instance "qmail-todo"
2502 </Directory>
2503 <Directory "/var/lib/php5">
2504 Instance "php5-sessions"
2505 Name "sess_*"
2506 </Directory>
2507 </Plugin>
2509 The example above counts the number of files in QMail's queue directories and
2510 the number of PHP5 sessions. Jfiy: The "todo" queue holds the messages that
2511 QMail has not yet looked at, the "message" queue holds the messages that were
2512 classified into "local" and "remote".
2514 As you can see, the configuration consists of one or more C<Directory> blocks,
2515 each of which specifies a directory in which to count the files. Within those
2516 blocks, the following options are recognized:
2518 =over 4
2520 =item B<Instance> I<Instance>
2522 Sets the plugin instance to I<Instance>. That instance name must be unique, but
2523 it's your responsibility, the plugin doesn't check for that. If not given, the
2524 instance is set to the directory name with all slashes replaced by underscores
2525 and all leading underscores removed.
2527 =item B<Name> I<Pattern>
2529 Only count files that match I<Pattern>, where I<Pattern> is a shell-like
2530 wildcard as understood by L<fnmatch(3)>. Only the B<filename> is checked
2531 against the pattern, not the entire path. In case this makes it easier for you:
2532 This option has been named after the B<-name> parameter to L<find(1)>.
2534 =item B<MTime> I<Age>
2536 Count only files of a specific age: If I<Age> is greater than zero, only files
2537 that haven't been touched in the last I<Age> seconds are counted. If I<Age> is
2538 a negative number, this is inversed. For example, if B<-60> is specified, only
2539 files that have been modified in the last minute will be counted.
2541 The number can also be followed by a "multiplier" to easily specify a larger
2542 timespan. When given in this notation, the argument must in quoted, i.E<nbsp>e.
2543 must be passed as string. So the B<-60> could also be written as B<"-1m"> (one
2544 minute). Valid multipliers are C<s> (second), C<m> (minute), C<h> (hour), C<d>
2545 (day), C<w> (week), and C<y> (year). There is no "month" multiplier. You can
2546 also specify fractional numbers, e.E<nbsp>g. B<"0.5d"> is identical to
2547 B<"12h">.
2549 =item B<Size> I<Size>
2551 Count only files of a specific size. When I<Size> is a positive number, only
2552 files that are at least this big are counted. If I<Size> is a negative number,
2553 this is inversed, i.E<nbsp>e. only files smaller than the absolute value of
2554 I<Size> are counted.
2556 As with the B<MTime> option, a "multiplier" may be added. For a detailed
2557 description see above. Valid multipliers here are C<b> (byte), C<k> (kilobyte),
2558 C<m> (megabyte), C<g> (gigabyte), C<t> (terabyte), and C<p> (petabyte). Please
2559 note that there are 1000 bytes in a kilobyte, not 1024.
2561 =item B<Recursive> I<true>|I<false>
2563 Controls whether or not to recurse into subdirectories. Enabled by default.
2565 =item B<IncludeHidden> I<true>|I<false>
2567 Controls whether or not to include "hidden" files and directories in the count.
2568 "Hidden" files and directories are those, whose name begins with a dot.
2569 Defaults to I<false>, i.e. by default hidden files and directories are ignored.
2571 =back
2573 =head2 Plugin C<GenericJMX>
2575 The I<GenericJMX plugin> is written in I<Java> and therefore documented in
2576 L<collectd-java(5)>.
2578 =head2 Plugin C<gmond>
2580 The I<gmond> plugin received the multicast traffic sent by B<gmond>, the
2581 statistics collection daemon of Ganglia. Mappings for the standard "metrics"
2582 are built-in, custom mappings may be added via B<Metric> blocks, see below.
2584 Synopsis:
2586 <Plugin "gmond">
2587 MCReceiveFrom "239.2.11.71" "8649"
2588 <Metric "swap_total">
2589 Type "swap"
2590 TypeInstance "total"
2591 DataSource "value"
2592 </Metric>
2593 <Metric "swap_free">
2594 Type "swap"
2595 TypeInstance "free"
2596 DataSource "value"
2597 </Metric>
2598 </Plugin>
2600 The following metrics are built-in:
2602 =over 4
2604 =item *
2606 load_one, load_five, load_fifteen
2608 =item *
2610 cpu_user, cpu_system, cpu_idle, cpu_nice, cpu_wio
2612 =item *
2614 mem_free, mem_shared, mem_buffers, mem_cached, mem_total
2616 =item *
2618 bytes_in, bytes_out
2620 =item *
2622 pkts_in, pkts_out
2624 =back
2626 Available configuration options:
2628 =over 4
2630 =item B<MCReceiveFrom> I<MCGroup> [I<Port>]
2632 Sets sets the multicast group and UDP port to which to subscribe.
2634 Default: B<239.2.11.71>E<nbsp>/E<nbsp>B<8649>
2636 =item E<lt>B<Metric> I<Name>E<gt>
2638 These blocks add a new metric conversion to the internal table. I<Name>, the
2639 string argument to the B<Metric> block, is the metric name as used by Ganglia.
2641 =over 4
2643 =item B<Type> I<Type>
2645 Type to map this metric to. Required.
2647 =item B<TypeInstance> I<Instance>
2649 Type-instance to use. Optional.
2651 =item B<DataSource> I<Name>
2653 Data source to map this metric to. If the configured type has exactly one data
2654 source, this is optional. Otherwise the option is required.
2656 =back
2658 =back
2660 =head2 Plugin C<gps>
2662 The C<gps plugin> connects to gpsd on the host machine.
2663 The host, port, timeout and pause are configurable.
2665 This is useful if you run an NTP server using a GPS for source and you want to
2666 monitor it.
2668 Mind your GPS must send $--GSA for having the data reported!
2670 The following elements are collected:
2672 =over 4
2674 =item B<satellites>
2676 Number of satellites used for fix (type instance "used") and in view (type
2677 instance "visible"). 0 means no GPS satellites are visible.
2679 =item B<dilution_of_precision>
2681 Vertical and horizontal dilution (type instance "horizontal" or "vertical").
2682 It should be between 0 and 3.
2683 Look at the documentation of your GPS to know more.
2685 =back
2687 Synopsis:
2689 LoadPlugin gps
2690 <Plugin "gps">
2691 # Connect to localhost on gpsd regular port:
2692 Host "127.0.0.1"
2693 Port "2947"
2694 # 15 ms timeout
2695 Timeout 0.015
2696 # PauseConnect of 5 sec. between connection attempts.
2697 PauseConnect 5
2698 </Plugin>
2700 Available configuration options:
2702 =over 4
2704 =item B<Host> I<Host>
2706 The host on which gpsd daemon runs. Defaults to B<localhost>.
2708 =item B<Port> I<Port>
2710 Port to connect to gpsd on the host machine. Defaults to B<2947>.
2712 =item B<Timeout> I<Seconds>
2714 Timeout in seconds (default 0.015 sec).
2716 The GPS data stream is fetch by the plugin form the daemon.
2717 It waits for data to be available, if none arrives it times out
2718 and loop for another reading.
2719 Mind to put a low value gpsd expects value in the micro-seconds area
2720 (recommended is 500 us) since the waiting function is blocking.
2721 Value must be between 500 us and 5 sec., if outside that range the
2722 default value is applied.
2724 This only applies from gpsd release-2.95.
2726 =item B<PauseConnect> I<Seconds>
2728 Pause to apply between attempts of connection to gpsd in seconds (default 5 sec).
2730 =back
2732 =head2 Plugin C<grpc>
2734 The I<grpc> plugin provides an RPC interface to submit values to or query
2735 values from collectd based on the open source gRPC framework. It exposes an
2736 end-point for dispatching values to the daemon.
2738 The B<gRPC> homepage can be found at L<https://grpc.io/>.
2740 =over 4
2742 =item B<Server> I<Host> I<Port>
2744 The B<Server> statement sets the address of a server to which to send metrics
2745 via the C<DispatchValues> function.
2747 The argument I<Host> may be a hostname, an IPv4 address, or an IPv6 address.
2749 Optionally, B<Server> may be specified as a configuration block which supports
2750 the following options:
2752 =over 4
2754 =item B<EnableSSL> B<false>|B<true>
2756 Whether to require SSL for outgoing connections. Default: false.
2758 =item B<SSLCACertificateFile> I<Filename>
2760 =item B<SSLCertificateFile> I<Filename>
2762 =item B<SSLCertificateKeyFile> I<Filename>
2764 Filenames specifying SSL certificate and key material to be used with SSL
2765 connections.
2767 =back
2769 =item B<Listen> I<Host> I<Port>
2771 The B<Listen> statement sets the network address to bind to. When multiple
2772 statements are specified, the daemon will bind to all of them. If none are
2773 specified, it defaults to B<0.0.0.0:50051>.
2775 The argument I<Host> may be a hostname, an IPv4 address, or an IPv6 address.
2777 Optionally, B<Listen> may be specified as a configuration block which
2778 supports the following options:
2780 =over 4
2782 =item B<EnableSSL> I<true>|I<false>
2784 Whether to enable SSL for incoming connections. Default: false.
2786 =item B<SSLCACertificateFile> I<Filename>
2788 =item B<SSLCertificateFile> I<Filename>
2790 =item B<SSLCertificateKeyFile> I<Filename>
2792 Filenames specifying SSL certificate and key material to be used with SSL
2793 connections.
2795 =back
2797 =back
2799 =head2 Plugin C<hddtemp>
2801 To get values from B<hddtemp> collectd connects to B<localhost> (127.0.0.1),
2802 port B<7634/tcp>. The B<Host> and B<Port> options can be used to change these
2803 default values, see below. C<hddtemp> has to be running to work correctly. If
2804 C<hddtemp> is not running timeouts may appear which may interfere with other
2805 statistics..
2807 The B<hddtemp> homepage can be found at
2808 L<http://www.guzu.net/linux/hddtemp.php>.
2810 =over 4
2812 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
2814 Hostname to connect to. Defaults to B<127.0.0.1>.
2816 =item B<Port> I<Port>
2818 TCP-Port to connect to. Defaults to B<7634>.
2820 =back
2822 =head2 Plugin C<interface>
2824 =over 4
2826 =item B<Interface> I<Interface>
2828 Select this interface. By default these interfaces will then be collected. For
2829 a more detailed description see B<IgnoreSelected> below.
2831 =item B<IgnoreSelected> I<true>|I<false>
2833 If no configuration if given, the B<interface>-plugin will collect data from
2834 all interfaces. This may not be practical, especially for loopback- and
2835 similar interfaces. Thus, you can use the B<Interface>-option to pick the
2836 interfaces you're interested in. Sometimes, however, it's easier/preferred
2837 to collect all interfaces I<except> a few ones. This option enables you to
2838 do that: By setting B<IgnoreSelected> to I<true> the effect of
2839 B<Interface> is inverted: All selected interfaces are ignored and all
2840 other interfaces are collected.
2842 It is possible to use regular expressions to match interface names, if the
2843 name is surrounded by I</.../> and collectd was compiled with support for
2844 regexps. This is useful if there's a need to collect (or ignore) data
2845 for a group of interfaces that are similarly named, without the need to
2846 explicitly list all of them (especially useful if the list is dynamic).
2847 Example:
2849 Interface "lo"
2850 Interface "/^veth/"
2851 Interface "/^tun[0-9]+/"
2852 IgnoreSelected "true"
2854 This will ignore the loopback interface, all interfaces with names starting
2855 with I<veth> and all interfaces with names starting with I<tun> followed by
2856 at least one digit.
2858 =item B<ReportInactive> I<true>|I<false>
2860 When set to I<false>, only interfaces with non-zero traffic will be
2861 reported. Note that the check is done by looking into whether a
2862 package was sent at any time from boot and the corresponding counter
2863 is non-zero. So, if the interface has been sending data in the past
2864 since boot, but not during the reported time-interval, it will still
2865 be reported.
2867 The default value is I<true> and results in collection of the data
2868 from all interfaces that are selected by B<Interface> and
2869 B<IgnoreSelected> options.
2871 =item B<UniqueName> I<true>|I<false>
2873 Interface name is not unique on Solaris (KSTAT), interface name is unique
2874 only within a module/instance. Following tuple is considered unique:
2875 (ks_module, ks_instance, ks_name)
2876 If this option is set to true, interface name contains above three fields
2877 separated by an underscore. For more info on KSTAT, visit
2878 L<http://docs.oracle.com/cd/E23824_01/html/821-1468/kstat-3kstat.html#REFMAN3Ekstat-3kstat>
2880 This option is only available on Solaris.
2882 =back
2884 =head2 Plugin C<ipmi>
2886 =over 4
2888 =item B<Sensor> I<Sensor>
2890 Selects sensors to collect or to ignore, depending on B<IgnoreSelected>.
2892 =item B<IgnoreSelected> I<true>|I<false>
2894 If no configuration if given, the B<ipmi> plugin will collect data from all
2895 sensors found of type "temperature", "voltage", "current" and "fanspeed".
2896 This option enables you to do that: By setting B<IgnoreSelected> to I<true>
2897 the effect of B<Sensor> is inverted: All selected sensors are ignored and
2898 all other sensors are collected.
2900 =item B<NotifySensorAdd> I<true>|I<false>
2902 If a sensor appears after initialization time of a minute a notification
2903 is sent.
2905 =item B<NotifySensorRemove> I<true>|I<false>
2907 If a sensor disappears a notification is sent.
2909 =item B<NotifySensorNotPresent> I<true>|I<false>
2911 If you have for example dual power supply and one of them is (un)plugged then
2912 a notification is sent.
2914 =back
2916 =head2 Plugin C<iptables>
2918 =over 4
2920 =item B<Chain> I<Table> I<Chain> [I<Comment|Number> [I<Name>]]
2922 =item B<Chain6> I<Table> I<Chain> [I<Comment|Number> [I<Name>]]
2924 Select the iptables/ip6tables filter rules to count packets and bytes from.
2926 If only I<Table> and I<Chain> are given, this plugin will collect the counters
2927 of all rules which have a comment-match. The comment is then used as
2928 type-instance.
2930 If I<Comment> or I<Number> is given, only the rule with the matching comment or
2931 the I<n>th rule will be collected. Again, the comment (or the number) will be
2932 used as the type-instance.
2934 If I<Name> is supplied, it will be used as the type-instance instead of the
2935 comment or the number.
2937 =back
2939 =head2 Plugin C<irq>
2941 =over 4
2943 =item B<Irq> I<Irq>
2945 Select this irq. By default these irqs will then be collected. For a more
2946 detailed description see B<IgnoreSelected> below.
2948 =item B<IgnoreSelected> I<true>|I<false>
2950 If no configuration if given, the B<irq>-plugin will collect data from all
2951 irqs. This may not be practical, especially if no interrupts happen. Thus, you
2952 can use the B<Irq>-option to pick the interrupt you're interested in.
2953 Sometimes, however, it's easier/preferred to collect all interrupts I<except> a
2954 few ones. This option enables you to do that: By setting B<IgnoreSelected> to
2955 I<true> the effect of B<Irq> is inverted: All selected interrupts are ignored
2956 and all other interrupts are collected.
2958 =back
2960 =head2 Plugin C<java>
2962 The I<Java> plugin makes it possible to write extensions for collectd in Java.
2963 This section only discusses the syntax and semantic of the configuration
2964 options. For more in-depth information on the I<Java> plugin, please read
2965 L<collectd-java(5)>.
2967 Synopsis:
2969 <Plugin "java">
2970 JVMArg "-verbose:jni"
2971 JVMArg "-Djava.class.path=/opt/collectd/lib/collectd/bindings/java"
2972 LoadPlugin "org.collectd.java.Foobar"
2973 <Plugin "org.collectd.java.Foobar">
2974 # To be parsed by the plugin
2975 </Plugin>
2976 </Plugin>
2978 Available configuration options:
2980 =over 4
2982 =item B<JVMArg> I<Argument>
2984 Argument that is to be passed to the I<Java Virtual Machine> (JVM). This works
2985 exactly the way the arguments to the I<java> binary on the command line work.
2986 Execute C<javaE<nbsp>--help> for details.
2988 Please note that B<all> these options must appear B<before> (i.E<nbsp>e. above)
2989 any other options! When another option is found, the JVM will be started and
2990 later options will have to be ignored!
2992 =item B<LoadPlugin> I<JavaClass>
2994 Instantiates a new I<JavaClass> object. The constructor of this object very
2995 likely then registers one or more callback methods with the server.
2997 See L<collectd-java(5)> for details.
2999 When the first such option is found, the virtual machine (JVM) is created. This
3000 means that all B<JVMArg> options must appear before (i.E<nbsp>e. above) all
3001 B<LoadPlugin> options!
3003 =item B<Plugin> I<Name>
3005 The entire block is passed to the Java plugin as an
3006 I<org.collectd.api.OConfigItem> object.
3008 For this to work, the plugin has to register a configuration callback first,
3009 see L<collectd-java(5)/"config callback">. This means, that the B<Plugin> block
3010 must appear after the appropriate B<LoadPlugin> block. Also note, that I<Name>
3011 depends on the (Java) plugin registering the callback and is completely
3012 independent from the I<JavaClass> argument passed to B<LoadPlugin>.
3014 =back
3016 =head2 Plugin C<load>
3018 The I<Load plugin> collects the system load. These numbers give a rough overview
3019 over the utilization of a machine. The system load is defined as the number of
3020 runnable tasks in the run-queue and is provided by many operating systems as a
3021 one, five or fifteen minute average.
3023 The following configuration options are available:
3025 =over 4
3027 =item B<ReportRelative> B<false>|B<true>
3029 When enabled, system load divided by number of available CPU cores is reported
3030 for intervals 1 min, 5 min and 15 min. Defaults to false.
3032 =back
3035 =head2 Plugin C<logfile>
3037 =over 4
3039 =item B<LogLevel> B<debug|info|notice|warning|err>
3041 Sets the log-level. If, for example, set to B<notice>, then all events with
3042 severity B<notice>, B<warning>, or B<err> will be written to the logfile.
3044 Please note that B<debug> is only available if collectd has been compiled with
3045 debugging support.
3047 =item B<File> I<File>
3049 Sets the file to write log messages to. The special strings B<stdout> and
3050 B<stderr> can be used to write to the standard output and standard error
3051 channels, respectively. This, of course, only makes much sense when I<collectd>
3052 is running in foreground- or non-daemon-mode.
3054 =item B<Timestamp> B<true>|B<false>
3056 Prefix all lines printed by the current time. Defaults to B<true>.
3058 =item B<PrintSeverity> B<true>|B<false>
3060 When enabled, all lines are prefixed by the severity of the log message, for
3061 example "warning". Defaults to B<false>.
3063 =back
3065 B<Note>: There is no need to notify the daemon after moving or removing the
3066 log file (e.E<nbsp>g. when rotating the logs). The plugin reopens the file
3067 for each line it writes.
3069 =head2 Plugin C<log_logstash>
3071 The I<log logstash plugin> behaves like the logfile plugin but formats
3072 messages as JSON events for logstash to parse and input.
3074 =over 4
3076 =item B<LogLevel> B<debug|info|notice|warning|err>
3078 Sets the log-level. If, for example, set to B<notice>, then all events with
3079 severity B<notice>, B<warning>, or B<err> will be written to the logfile.
3081 Please note that B<debug> is only available if collectd has been compiled with
3082 debugging support.
3084 =item B<File> I<File>
3086 Sets the file to write log messages to. The special strings B<stdout> and
3087 B<stderr> can be used to write to the standard output and standard error
3088 channels, respectively. This, of course, only makes much sense when I<collectd>
3089 is running in foreground- or non-daemon-mode.
3091 =back
3093 B<Note>: There is no need to notify the daemon after moving or removing the
3094 log file (e.E<nbsp>g. when rotating the logs). The plugin reopens the file
3095 for each line it writes.
3097 =head2 Plugin C<lpar>
3099 The I<LPAR plugin> reads CPU statistics of I<Logical Partitions>, a
3100 virtualization technique for IBM POWER processors. It takes into account CPU
3101 time stolen from or donated to a partition, in addition to the usual user,
3102 system, I/O statistics.
3104 The following configuration options are available:
3106 =over 4
3108 =item B<CpuPoolStats> B<false>|B<true>
3110 When enabled, statistics about the processor pool are read, too. The partition
3111 needs to have pool authority in order to be able to acquire this information.
3112 Defaults to false.
3114 =item B<ReportBySerial> B<false>|B<true>
3116 If enabled, the serial of the physical machine the partition is currently
3117 running on is reported as I<hostname> and the logical hostname of the machine
3118 is reported in the I<plugin instance>. Otherwise, the logical hostname will be
3119 used (just like other plugins) and the I<plugin instance> will be empty.
3120 Defaults to false.
3122 =back
3124 =head2 Plugin C<lua>
3126 This plugin embeds a Lua interpreter into collectd and provides an interface
3127 to collectd's plugin system. See L<collectd-lua(5)> for its documentation.
3130 =head2 Plugin C<mbmon>
3132 The C<mbmon plugin> uses mbmon to retrieve temperature, voltage, etc.
3134 Be default collectd connects to B<localhost> (127.0.0.1), port B<411/tcp>. The
3135 B<Host> and B<Port> options can be used to change these values, see below.
3136 C<mbmon> has to be running to work correctly. If C<mbmon> is not running
3137 timeouts may appear which may interfere with other statistics..
3139 C<mbmon> must be run with the -r option ("print TAG and Value format");
3140 Debian's F</etc/init.d/mbmon> script already does this, other people
3141 will need to ensure that this is the case.
3143 =over 4
3145 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
3147 Hostname to connect to. Defaults to B<127.0.0.1>.
3149 =item B<Port> I<Port>
3151 TCP-Port to connect to. Defaults to B<411>.
3153 =back
3155 =head2 Plugin C<md>
3157 The C<md plugin> collects information from Linux Software-RAID devices (md).
3159 All reported values are of the type C<md_disks>. Reported type instances are
3160 I<active>, I<failed> (present but not operational), I<spare> (hot stand-by) and
3161 I<missing> (physically absent) disks.
3163 =over 4
3165 =item B<Device> I<Device>
3167 Select md devices based on device name. The I<device name> is the basename of
3168 the device, i.e. the name of the block device without the leading C</dev/>.
3169 See B<IgnoreSelected> for more details.
3171 =item B<IgnoreSelected> B<true>|B<false>
3173 Invert device selection: If set to B<true>, all md devices B<except> those
3174 listed using B<Device> are collected. If B<false> (the default), only those
3175 listed are collected. If no configuration is given, the B<md> plugin will
3176 collect data from all md devices.
3178 =back
3180 =head2 Plugin C<memcachec>
3182 The C<memcachec plugin> connects to a memcached server, queries one or more
3183 given I<pages> and parses the returned data according to user specification.
3184 The I<matches> used are the same as the matches used in the C<curl> and C<tail>
3185 plugins.
3187 In order to talk to the memcached server, this plugin uses the I<libmemcached>
3188 library. Please note that there is another library with a very similar name,
3189 libmemcache (notice the missing `d'), which is not applicable.
3191 Synopsis of the configuration:
3193 <Plugin "memcachec">
3194 <Page "plugin_instance">
3195 Server "localhost"
3196 Key "page_key"
3197 <Match>
3198 Regex "(\\d+) bytes sent"
3199 DSType CounterAdd
3200 Type "ipt_octets"
3201 Instance "type_instance"
3202 </Match>
3203 </Page>
3204 </Plugin>
3206 The configuration options are:
3208 =over 4
3210 =item E<lt>B<Page> I<Name>E<gt>
3212 Each B<Page> block defines one I<page> to be queried from the memcached server.
3213 The block requires one string argument which is used as I<plugin instance>.
3215 =item B<Server> I<Address>
3217 Sets the server address to connect to when querying the page. Must be inside a
3218 B<Page> block.
3220 =item B<Key> I<Key>
3222 When connected to the memcached server, asks for the page I<Key>.
3224 =item E<lt>B<Match>E<gt>
3226 Match blocks define which strings to look for and how matches substrings are
3227 interpreted. For a description of match blocks, please see L<"Plugin tail">.
3229 =back
3231 =head2 Plugin C<memcached>
3233 The B<memcached plugin> connects to a memcached server and queries statistics
3234 about cache utilization, memory and bandwidth used.
3235 L<http://www.danga.com/memcached/>
3237 <Plugin "memcached">
3238 <Instance "name">
3239 Host "memcache.example.com"
3240 Port 11211
3241 </Instance>
3242 </Plugin>
3244 The plugin configuration consists of one or more B<Instance> blocks which
3245 specify one I<memcached> connection each. Within the B<Instance> blocks, the
3246 following options are allowed:
3248 =over 4
3250 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
3252 Hostname to connect to. Defaults to B<127.0.0.1>.
3254 =item B<Port> I<Port>
3256 TCP-Port to connect to. Defaults to B<11211>.
3258 =item B<Socket> I<Path>
3260 Connect to I<memcached> using the UNIX domain socket at I<Path>. If this
3261 setting is given, the B<Host> and B<Port> settings are ignored.
3263 =back
3265 =head2 Plugin C<mic>
3267 The B<mic plugin> gathers CPU statistics, memory usage and temperatures from
3268 Intel's Many Integrated Core (MIC) systems.
3270 B<Synopsis:>
3272 <Plugin mic>
3273 ShowCPU true
3274 ShowCPUCores true
3275 ShowMemory true
3277 ShowTemperatures true
3278 Temperature vddg
3279 Temperature vddq
3280 IgnoreSelectedTemperature true
3282 ShowPower true
3283 Power total0
3284 Power total1
3285 IgnoreSelectedPower true
3286 </Plugin>
3288 The following options are valid inside the B<PluginE<nbsp>mic> block:
3290 =over 4
3292 =item B<ShowCPU> B<true>|B<false>
3294 If enabled (the default) a sum of the CPU usage across all cores is reported.
3296 =item B<ShowCPUCores> B<true>|B<false>
3298 If enabled (the default) per-core CPU usage is reported.
3300 =item B<ShowMemory> B<true>|B<false>
3302 If enabled (the default) the physical memory usage of the MIC system is
3303 reported.
3305 =item B<ShowTemperatures> B<true>|B<false>
3307 If enabled (the default) various temperatures of the MIC system are reported.
3309 =item B<Temperature> I<Name>
3311 This option controls which temperatures are being reported. Whether matching
3312 temperatures are being ignored or I<only> matching temperatures are reported
3313 depends on the B<IgnoreSelectedTemperature> setting below. By default I<all>
3314 temperatures are reported.
3316 =item B<IgnoreSelectedTemperature> B<false>|B<true>
3318 Controls the behavior of the B<Temperature> setting above. If set to B<false>
3319 (the default) only temperatures matching a B<Temperature> option are reported
3320 or, if no B<Temperature> option is specified, all temperatures are reported. If
3321 set to B<true>, matching temperatures are I<ignored> and all other temperatures
3322 are reported.
3324 Known temperature names are:
3326 =over 4
3328 =item die
3330 Die of the CPU
3332 =item devmem
3334 Device Memory
3336 =item fin
3338 Fan In
3340 =item fout
3342 Fan Out
3344 =item vccp
3346 Voltage ccp
3348 =item vddg
3350 Voltage ddg
3352 =item vddq
3354 Voltage ddq
3356 =back
3358 =item B<ShowPower> B<true>|B<false>
3360 If enabled (the default) various temperatures of the MIC system are reported.
3362 =item B<Power> I<Name>
3364 This option controls which power readings are being reported. Whether matching
3365 power readings are being ignored or I<only> matching power readings are reported
3366 depends on the B<IgnoreSelectedPower> setting below. By default I<all>
3367 power readings are reported.
3369 =item B<IgnoreSelectedPower> B<false>|B<true>
3371 Controls the behavior of the B<Power> setting above. If set to B<false>
3372 (the default) only power readings matching a B<Power> option are reported
3373 or, if no B<Power> option is specified, all power readings are reported. If
3374 set to B<true>, matching power readings are I<ignored> and all other power readings
3375 are reported.
3377 Known power names are:
3379 =over 4
3381 =item total0
3383 Total power utilization averaged over Time Window 0 (uWatts).
3385 =item total1
3387 Total power utilization averaged over Time Window 0 (uWatts).
3389 =item inst
3391 Instantaneous power (uWatts).
3393 =item imax
3395 Max instantaneous power (uWatts).
3397 =item pcie
3399 PCI-E connector power (uWatts).
3401 =item c2x3
3403 2x3 connector power (uWatts).
3405 =item c2x4
3407 2x4 connector power (uWatts).
3409 =item vccp
3411 Core rail (uVolts).
3413 =item vddg
3415 Uncore rail (uVolts).
3417 =item vddq
3419 Memory subsystem rail (uVolts).
3421 =back
3423 =back
3425 =head2 Plugin C<memory>
3427 The I<memory plugin> provides the following configuration options:
3429 =over 4
3431 =item B<ValuesAbsolute> B<true>|B<false>
3433 Enables or disables reporting of physical memory usage in absolute numbers,
3434 i.e. bytes. Defaults to B<true>.
3436 =item B<ValuesPercentage> B<false>|B<true>
3438 Enables or disables reporting of physical memory usage in percentages, e.g.
3439 percent of physical memory used. Defaults to B<false>.
3441 This is useful for deploying I<collectd> in a heterogeneous environment in
3442 which the sizes of physical memory vary.
3444 =back
3446 =head2 Plugin C<modbus>
3448 The B<modbus plugin> connects to a Modbus "slave" via Modbus/TCP or Modbus/RTU and
3449 reads register values. It supports reading single registers (unsigned 16E<nbsp>bit
3450 values), large integer values (unsigned 32E<nbsp>bit values) and floating point
3451 values (two registers interpreted as IEEE floats in big endian notation).
3453 B<Synopsis:>
3455 <Data "voltage-input-1">
3456 RegisterBase 0
3457 RegisterType float
3458 RegisterCmd ReadHolding
3459 Type voltage
3460 Instance "input-1"
3461 </Data>
3463 <Data "voltage-input-2">
3464 RegisterBase 2
3465 RegisterType float
3466 RegisterCmd ReadHolding
3467 Type voltage
3468 Instance "input-2"
3469 </Data>
3471 <Data "supply-temperature-1">
3472 RegisterBase 0
3473 RegisterType Int16
3474 RegisterCmd ReadHolding
3475 Type temperature
3476 Instance "temp-1"
3477 </Data>
3479 <Host "modbus.example.com">
3480 Address "192.168.0.42"
3481 Port "502"
3482 Interval 60
3484 <Slave 1>
3485 Instance "power-supply"
3486 Collect "voltage-input-1"
3487 Collect "voltage-input-2"
3488 </Slave>
3489 </Host>
3491 <Host "localhost">
3492 Device "/dev/ttyUSB0"
3493 Baudrate 38400
3494 Interval 20
3496 <Slave 1>
3497 Instance "temperature"
3498 Collect "supply-temperature-1"
3499 </Slave>
3500 </Host>
3502 =over 4
3504 =item E<lt>B<Data> I<Name>E<gt> blocks
3506 Data blocks define a mapping between register numbers and the "types" used by
3507 I<collectd>.
3509 Within E<lt>DataE<nbsp>/E<gt> blocks, the following options are allowed:
3511 =over 4
3513 =item B<RegisterBase> I<Number>
3515 Configures the base register to read from the device. If the option
3516 B<RegisterType> has been set to B<Uint32> or B<Float>, this and the next
3517 register will be read (the register number is increased by one).
3519 =item B<RegisterType> B<Int16>|B<Int32>|B<Uint16>|B<Uint32>|B<Float>
3521 Specifies what kind of data is returned by the device. If the type is B<Int32>,
3522 B<Uint32> or B<Float>, two 16E<nbsp>bit registers will be read and the data is
3523 combined into one value. Defaults to B<Uint16>.
3525 =item B<RegisterCmd> B<ReadHolding>|B<ReadInput>
3527 Specifies register type to be collected from device. Works only with libmodbus
3528 2.9.2 or higher. Defaults to B<ReadHolding>.
3530 =item B<Type> I<Type>
3532 Specifies the "type" (data set) to use when dispatching the value to
3533 I<collectd>. Currently, only data sets with exactly one data source are
3534 supported.
3536 =item B<Instance> I<Instance>
3538 Sets the type instance to use when dispatching the value to I<collectd>. If
3539 unset, an empty string (no type instance) is used.
3541 =back
3543 =item E<lt>B<Host> I<Name>E<gt> blocks
3545 Host blocks are used to specify to which hosts to connect and what data to read
3546 from their "slaves". The string argument I<Name> is used as hostname when
3547 dispatching the values to I<collectd>.
3549 Within E<lt>HostE<nbsp>/E<gt> blocks, the following options are allowed:
3551 =over 4
3553 =item B<Address> I<Hostname>
3555 For Modbus/TCP, specifies the node name (the actual network address) used to
3556 connect to the host. This may be an IP address or a hostname. Please note that
3557 the used I<libmodbus> library only supports IPv4 at the moment.
3559 =item B<Port> I<Service>
3561 for Modbus/TCP, specifies the port used to connect to the host. The port can
3562 either be given as a number or as a service name. Please note that the
3563 I<Service> argument must be a string, even if ports are given in their numerical
3564 form. Defaults to "502".
3566 =item B<Device> I<Devicenode>
3568 For Modbus/RTU, specifies the path to the serial device being used.
3570 =item B<Baudrate> I<Baudrate>
3572 For Modbus/RTU, specifies the baud rate of the serial device.
3573 Note, connections currently support only 8/N/1.
3575 =item B<Interval> I<Interval>
3577 Sets the interval (in seconds) in which the values will be collected from this
3578 host. By default the global B<Interval> setting will be used.
3580 =item E<lt>B<Slave> I<ID>E<gt>
3582 Over each connection, multiple Modbus devices may be reached. The slave ID
3583 is used to specify which device should be addressed. For each device you want
3584 to query, one B<Slave> block must be given.
3586 Within E<lt>SlaveE<nbsp>/E<gt> blocks, the following options are allowed:
3588 =over 4
3590 =item B<Instance> I<Instance>
3592 Specify the plugin instance to use when dispatching the values to I<collectd>.
3593 By default "slave_I<ID>" is used.
3595 =item B<Collect> I<DataName>
3597 Specifies which data to retrieve from the device. I<DataName> must be the same
3598 string as the I<Name> argument passed to a B<Data> block. You can specify this
3599 option multiple times to collect more than one value from a slave. At least one
3600 B<Collect> option is mandatory.
3602 =back
3604 =back
3606 =back
3608 =head2 Plugin C<mqtt>
3610 The I<MQTT plugin> can send metrics to MQTT (B<Publish> blocks) and receive
3611 values from MQTT (B<Subscribe> blocks).
3613 B<Synopsis:>
3615 <Plugin mqtt>
3616 <Publish "name">
3617 Host "mqtt.example.com"
3618 Prefix "collectd"
3619 </Publish>
3620 <Subscribe "name">
3621 Host "mqtt.example.com"
3622 Topic "collectd/#"
3623 </Subscribe>
3624 </Plugin>
3626 The plugin's configuration is in B<Publish> and/or B<Subscribe> blocks,
3627 configuring the sending and receiving direction respectively. The plugin will
3628 register a write callback named C<mqtt/I<name>> where I<name> is the string
3629 argument given to the B<Publish> block. Both types of blocks share many but not
3630 all of the following options. If an option is valid in only one of the blocks,
3631 it will be mentioned explicitly.
3633 B<Options:>
3635 =over 4
3637 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
3639 Hostname of the MQTT broker to connect to.
3641 =item B<Port> I<Service>
3643 Port number or service name of the MQTT broker to connect to.
3645 =item B<User> I<UserName>
3647 Username used when authenticating to the MQTT broker.
3649 =item B<Password> I<Password>
3651 Password used when authenticating to the MQTT broker.
3653 =item B<ClientId> I<ClientId>
3655 MQTT client ID to use. Defaults to the hostname used by I<collectd>.
3657 =item B<QoS> [B<0>-B<2>]
3659 Sets the I<Quality of Service>, with the values C<0>, C<1> and C<2> meaning:
3661 =over 4
3663 =item B<0>
3665 At most once
3667 =item B<1>
3669 At least once
3671 =item B<2>
3673 Exactly once
3675 =back
3677 In B<Publish> blocks, this option determines the QoS flag set on outgoing
3678 messages and defaults to B<0>. In B<Subscribe> blocks, determines the maximum
3679 QoS setting the client is going to accept and defaults to B<2>. If the QoS flag
3680 on a message is larger than the maximum accepted QoS of a subscriber, the
3681 message's QoS will be downgraded.
3683 =item B<Prefix> I<Prefix> (Publish only)
3685 This plugin will use one topic per I<value list> which will looks like a path.
3686 I<Prefix> is used as the first path element and defaults to B<collectd>.
3688 An example topic name would be:
3690 collectd/cpu-0/cpu-user
3692 =item B<Retain> B<false>|B<true> (Publish only)
3694 Controls whether the MQTT broker will retain (keep a copy of) the last message
3695 sent to each topic and deliver it to new subscribers. Defaults to B<false>.
3697 =item B<StoreRates> B<true>|B<false> (Publish only)
3699 Controls whether C<DERIVE> and C<COUNTER> metrics are converted to a I<rate>
3700 before sending. Defaults to B<true>.
3702 =item B<CleanSession> B<true>|B<false> (Subscribe only)
3704 Controls whether the MQTT "cleans" the session up after the subscriber
3705 disconnects or if it maintains the subscriber's subscriptions and all messages
3706 that arrive while the subscriber is disconnected. Defaults to B<true>.
3708 =item B<Topic> I<TopicName> (Subscribe only)
3710 Configures the topic(s) to subscribe to. You can use the single level C<+> and
3711 multi level C<#> wildcards. Defaults to B<collectd/#>, i.e. all topics beneath
3712 the B<collectd> branch.
3714 =item B<CACert> I<file>
3716 Path to the PEM-encoded CA certificate file. Setting this option enables TLS
3717 communication with the MQTT broker, and as such, B<Port> should be the TLS-enabled
3718 port of the MQTT broker.
3719 A valid TLS configuration requires B<CACert>, B<CertificateFile> and B<CertificateKeyFile>.
3721 =item B<CertificateFile> I<file>
3723 Path to the PEM-encoded certificate file to use as client certificate when
3724 connecting to the MQTT broker.
3725 A valid TLS configuration requires B<CACert>, B<CertificateFile> and B<CertificateKeyFile>.
3727 =item B<CertificateKeyFile> I<file>
3729 Path to the unencrypted PEM-encoded key file corresponding to B<CertificateFile>.
3730 A valid TLS configuration requires B<CACert>, B<CertificateFile> and B<CertificateKeyFile>.
3732 =item B<TLSProtocol> I<protocol>
3734 If configured, this specifies the string protocol version (e.g. C<tlsv1>,
3735 C<tlsv1.2>) to use for the TLS connection to the broker. If not set a default
3736 version is used which depends on the version of OpenSSL the Mosquitto library
3737 was linked against.
3739 =item B<CipherSuite> I<ciphersuite>
3741 A string describing the ciphers available for use. See L<ciphers(1)> and the
3742 C<openssl ciphers> utility for more information. If unset, the default ciphers
3743 will be used.
3746 =back
3748 =head2 Plugin C<mysql>
3750 The C<mysql plugin> requires B<mysqlclient> to be installed. It connects to
3751 one or more databases when started and keeps the connection up as long as
3752 possible. When the connection is interrupted for whatever reason it will try
3753 to re-connect. The plugin will complain loudly in case anything goes wrong.
3755 This plugin issues the MySQL C<SHOW STATUS> / C<SHOW GLOBAL STATUS> command
3756 and collects information about MySQL network traffic, executed statements,
3757 requests, the query cache and threads by evaluating the
3758 C<Bytes_{received,sent}>, C<Com_*>, C<Handler_*>, C<Qcache_*> and C<Threads_*>
3759 return values. Please refer to the B<MySQL reference manual>, I<5.1.6. Server
3760 Status Variables> for an explanation of these values.
3762 Optionally, master and slave statistics may be collected in a MySQL
3763 replication setup. In that case, information about the synchronization state
3764 of the nodes are collected by evaluating the C<Position> return value of the
3765 C<SHOW MASTER STATUS> command and the C<Seconds_Behind_Master>,
3766 C<Read_Master_Log_Pos> and C<Exec_Master_Log_Pos> return values of the
3767 C<SHOW SLAVE STATUS> command. See the B<MySQL reference manual>,
3768 I<12.5.5.21 SHOW MASTER STATUS Syntax> and
3769 I<12.5.5.31 SHOW SLAVE STATUS Syntax> for details.
3771 Synopsis:
3773 <Plugin mysql>
3774 <Database foo>
3775 Host "hostname"
3776 User "username"
3777 Password "password"
3778 Port "3306"
3779 MasterStats true
3780 ConnectTimeout 10
3781 SSLKey "/path/to/key.pem"
3782 SSLCert "/path/to/cert.pem"
3783 SSLCA "/path/to/ca.pem"
3784 SSLCAPath "/path/to/cas/"
3785 SSLCipher "DHE-RSA-AES256-SHA"
3786 </Database>
3788 <Database bar>
3789 Alias "squeeze"
3790 Host "localhost"
3791 Socket "/var/run/mysql/mysqld.sock"
3792 SlaveStats true
3793 SlaveNotifications true
3794 </Database>
3796 <Database galera>
3797 Alias "galera"
3798 Host "localhost"
3799 Socket "/var/run/mysql/mysqld.sock"
3800 WsrepStats true
3801 </Database>
3802 </Plugin>
3804 A B<Database> block defines one connection to a MySQL database. It accepts a
3805 single argument which specifies the name of the database. None of the other
3806 options are required. MySQL will use default values as documented in the
3807 "mysql_real_connect()" and "mysql_ssl_set()" sections in the
3808 B<MySQL reference manual>.
3810 =over 4
3812 =item B<Alias> I<Alias>
3814 Alias to use as sender instead of hostname when reporting. This may be useful
3815 when having cryptic hostnames.
3817 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
3819 Hostname of the database server. Defaults to B<localhost>.
3821 =item B<User> I<Username>
3823 Username to use when connecting to the database. The user does not have to be
3824 granted any privileges (which is synonym to granting the C<USAGE> privilege),
3825 unless you want to collectd replication statistics (see B<MasterStats> and
3826 B<SlaveStats> below). In this case, the user needs the C<REPLICATION CLIENT>
3827 (or C<SUPER>) privileges. Else, any existing MySQL user will do.
3829 =item B<Password> I<Password>
3831 Password needed to log into the database.
3833 =item B<Database> I<Database>
3835 Select this database. Defaults to I<no database> which is a perfectly reasonable
3836 option for what this plugin does.
3838 =item B<Port> I<Port>
3840 TCP-port to connect to. The port must be specified in its numeric form, but it
3841 must be passed as a string nonetheless. For example:
3843 Port "3306"
3845 If B<Host> is set to B<localhost> (the default), this setting has no effect.
3846 See the documentation for the C<mysql_real_connect> function for details.
3848 =item B<Socket> I<Socket>
3850 Specifies the path to the UNIX domain socket of the MySQL server. This option
3851 only has any effect, if B<Host> is set to B<localhost> (the default).
3852 Otherwise, use the B<Port> option above. See the documentation for the
3853 C<mysql_real_connect> function for details.
3855 =item B<InnodbStats> I<true|false>
3857 If enabled, metrics about the InnoDB storage engine are collected.
3858 Disabled by default.
3860 =item B<MasterStats> I<true|false>
3862 =item B<SlaveStats> I<true|false>
3864 Enable the collection of master / slave statistics in a replication setup. In
3865 order to be able to get access to these statistics, the user needs special
3866 privileges. See the B<User> documentation above. Defaults to B<false>.
3868 =item B<SlaveNotifications> I<true|false>
3870 If enabled, the plugin sends a notification if the replication slave I/O and /
3871 or SQL threads are not running. Defaults to B<false>.
3873 =item B<WsrepStats> I<true|false>
3875 Enable the collection of wsrep plugin statistics, used in Master-Master
3876 replication setups like in MySQL Galera/Percona XtraDB Cluster.
3877 User needs only privileges to execute 'SHOW GLOBAL STATUS'
3879 =item B<ConnectTimeout> I<Seconds>
3881 Sets the connect timeout for the MySQL client.
3883 =item B<SSLKey> I<Path>
3885 If provided, the X509 key in PEM format.
3887 =item B<SSLCert> I<Path>
3889 If provided, the X509 cert in PEM format.
3891 =item B<SSLCA> I<Path>
3893 If provided, the CA file in PEM format (check OpenSSL docs).
3895 =item B<SSLCAPath> I<Path>
3897 If provided, the CA directory (check OpenSSL docs).
3899 =item B<SSLCipher> I<String>
3901 If provided, the SSL cipher to use.
3903 =back
3905 =head2 Plugin C<netapp>
3907 The netapp plugin can collect various performance and capacity information
3908 from a NetApp filer using the NetApp API.
3910 Please note that NetApp has a wide line of products and a lot of different
3911 software versions for each of these products. This plugin was developed for a
3912 NetApp FAS3040 running OnTap 7.2.3P8 and tested on FAS2050 7.3.1.1L1,
3913 FAS3140 7.2.5.1 and FAS3020 7.2.4P9. It I<should> work for most combinations of
3914 model and software version but it is very hard to test this.
3915 If you have used this plugin with other models and/or software version, feel
3916 free to send us a mail to tell us about the results, even if it's just a short
3917 "It works".
3919 To collect these data collectd will log in to the NetApp via HTTP(S) and HTTP
3920 basic authentication.
3922 B<Do not use a regular user for this!> Create a special collectd user with just
3923 the minimum of capabilities needed. The user only needs the "login-http-admin"
3924 capability as well as a few more depending on which data will be collected.
3925 Required capabilities are documented below.
3927 =head3 Synopsis
3929 <Plugin "netapp">
3930 <Host "netapp1.example.com">
3931 Protocol "https"
3932 Address "10.0.0.1"
3933 Port 443
3934 User "username"
3935 Password "aef4Aebe"
3936 Interval 30
3938 <WAFL>
3939 Interval 30
3940 GetNameCache true
3941 GetDirCache true
3942 GetBufferCache true
3943 GetInodeCache true
3944 </WAFL>
3946 <Disks>
3947 Interval 30
3948 GetBusy true
3949 </Disks>
3951 <VolumePerf>
3952 Interval 30
3953 GetIO "volume0"
3954 IgnoreSelectedIO false
3955 GetOps "volume0"
3956 IgnoreSelectedOps false
3957 GetLatency "volume0"
3958 IgnoreSelectedLatency false
3959 </VolumePerf>
3961 <VolumeUsage>
3962 Interval 30
3963 GetCapacity "vol0"
3964 GetCapacity "vol1"
3965 IgnoreSelectedCapacity false
3966 GetSnapshot "vol1"
3967 GetSnapshot "vol3"
3968 IgnoreSelectedSnapshot false
3969 </VolumeUsage>
3971 <Quota>
3972 Interval 60
3973 </Quota>
3975 <Snapvault>
3976 Interval 30
3977 </Snapvault>
3979 <System>
3980 Interval 30
3981 GetCPULoad true
3982 GetInterfaces true
3983 GetDiskOps true
3984 GetDiskIO true
3985 </System>
3987 <VFiler vfilerA>
3988 Interval 60
3990 SnapVault true
3991 # ...
3992 </VFiler>
3993 </Host>
3994 </Plugin>
3996 The netapp plugin accepts the following configuration options:
3998 =over 4
4000 =item B<Host> I<Name>
4002 A host block defines one NetApp filer. It will appear in collectd with the name
4003 you specify here which does not have to be its real name nor its hostname (see
4004 the B<Address> option below).
4006 =item B<VFiler> I<Name>
4008 A B<VFiler> block may only be used inside a host block. It accepts all the
4009 same options as the B<Host> block (except for cascaded B<VFiler> blocks) and
4010 will execute all NetApp API commands in the context of the specified
4011 VFiler(R). It will appear in collectd with the name you specify here which
4012 does not have to be its real name. The VFiler name may be specified using the
4013 B<VFilerName> option. If this is not specified, it will default to the name
4014 you specify here.
4016 The VFiler block inherits all connection related settings from the surrounding
4017 B<Host> block (which appear before the B<VFiler> block) but they may be
4018 overwritten inside the B<VFiler> block.
4020 This feature is useful, for example, when using a VFiler as SnapVault target
4021 (supported since OnTap 8.1). In that case, the SnapVault statistics are not
4022 available in the host filer (vfiler0) but only in the respective VFiler
4023 context.
4025 =item B<Protocol> B<httpd>|B<http>
4027 The protocol collectd will use to query this host.
4029 Optional
4031 Type: string
4033 Default: https
4035 Valid options: http, https
4037 =item B<Address> I<Address>
4039 The hostname or IP address of the host.
4041 Optional
4043 Type: string
4045 Default: The "host" block's name.
4047 =item B<Port> I<Port>
4049 The TCP port to connect to on the host.
4051 Optional
4053 Type: integer
4055 Default: 80 for protocol "http", 443 for protocol "https"
4057 =item B<User> I<User>
4059 =item B<Password> I<Password>
4061 The username and password to use to login to the NetApp.
4063 Mandatory
4065 Type: string
4067 =item B<VFilerName> I<Name>
4069 The name of the VFiler in which context to execute API commands. If not
4070 specified, the name provided to the B<VFiler> block will be used instead.
4072 Optional
4074 Type: string
4076 Default: name of the B<VFiler> block
4078 B<Note:> This option may only be used inside B<VFiler> blocks.
4080 =item B<Interval> I<Interval>
4082 B<TODO>
4084 =back
4086 The following options decide what kind of data will be collected. You can
4087 either use them as a block and fine tune various parameters inside this block,
4088 use them as a single statement to just accept all default values, or omit it to
4089 not collect any data.
4091 The following options are valid inside all blocks:
4093 =over 4
4095 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
4097 Collect the respective statistics every I<Seconds> seconds. Defaults to the
4098 host specific setting.
4100 =back
4102 =head3 The System block
4104 This will collect various performance data about the whole system.
4106 B<Note:> To get this data the collectd user needs the
4107 "api-perf-object-get-instances" capability.
4109 =over 4
4111 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
4113 Collect disk statistics every I<Seconds> seconds.
4115 =item B<GetCPULoad> B<true>|B<false>
4117 If you set this option to true the current CPU usage will be read. This will be
4118 the average usage between all CPUs in your NetApp without any information about
4119 individual CPUs.
4121 B<Note:> These are the same values that the NetApp CLI command "sysstat"
4122 returns in the "CPU" field.
4124 Optional
4126 Type: boolean
4128 Default: true
4130 Result: Two value lists of type "cpu", and type instances "idle" and "system".
4132 =item B<GetInterfaces> B<true>|B<false>
4134 If you set this option to true the current traffic of the network interfaces
4135 will be read. This will be the total traffic over all interfaces of your NetApp
4136 without any information about individual interfaces.
4138 B<Note:> This is the same values that the NetApp CLI command "sysstat" returns
4139 in the "Net kB/s" field.
4141 B<Or is it?>
4143 Optional
4145 Type: boolean
4147 Default: true
4149 Result: One value list of type "if_octects".
4151 =item B<GetDiskIO> B<true>|B<false>
4153 If you set this option to true the current IO throughput will be read. This
4154 will be the total IO of your NetApp without any information about individual
4155 disks, volumes or aggregates.
4157 B<Note:> This is the same values that the NetApp CLI command "sysstat" returns
4158 in the "DiskE<nbsp>kB/s" field.
4160 Optional
4162 Type: boolean
4164 Default: true
4166 Result: One value list of type "disk_octets".
4168 =item B<GetDiskOps> B<true>|B<false>
4170 If you set this option to true the current number of HTTP, NFS, CIFS, FCP,
4171 iSCSI, etc. operations will be read. This will be the total number of
4172 operations on your NetApp without any information about individual volumes or
4173 aggregates.
4175 B<Note:> These are the same values that the NetApp CLI command "sysstat"
4176 returns in the "NFS", "CIFS", "HTTP", "FCP" and "iSCSI" fields.
4178 Optional
4180 Type: boolean
4182 Default: true
4184 Result: A variable number of value lists of type "disk_ops_complex". Each type
4185 of operation will result in one value list with the name of the operation as
4186 type instance.
4188 =back
4190 =head3 The WAFL block
4192 This will collect various performance data about the WAFL file system. At the
4193 moment this just means cache performance.
4195 B<Note:> To get this data the collectd user needs the
4196 "api-perf-object-get-instances" capability.
4198 B<Note:> The interface to get these values is classified as "Diagnostics" by
4199 NetApp. This means that it is not guaranteed to be stable even between minor
4200 releases.
4202 =over 4
4204 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
4206 Collect disk statistics every I<Seconds> seconds.
4208 =item B<GetNameCache> B<true>|B<false>
4210 Optional
4212 Type: boolean
4214 Default: true
4216 Result: One value list of type "cache_ratio" and type instance
4217 "name_cache_hit".
4219 =item B<GetDirCache> B<true>|B<false>
4221 Optional
4223 Type: boolean
4225 Default: true
4227 Result: One value list of type "cache_ratio" and type instance "find_dir_hit".
4229 =item B<GetInodeCache> B<true>|B<false>
4231 Optional
4233 Type: boolean
4235 Default: true
4237 Result: One value list of type "cache_ratio" and type instance
4238 "inode_cache_hit".
4240 =item B<GetBufferCache> B<true>|B<false>
4242 B<Note:> This is the same value that the NetApp CLI command "sysstat" returns
4243 in the "Cache hit" field.
4245 Optional
4247 Type: boolean
4249 Default: true
4251 Result: One value list of type "cache_ratio" and type instance "buf_hash_hit".
4253 =back
4255 =head3 The Disks block
4257 This will collect performance data about the individual disks in the NetApp.
4259 B<Note:> To get this data the collectd user needs the
4260 "api-perf-object-get-instances" capability.
4262 =over 4
4264 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
4266 Collect disk statistics every I<Seconds> seconds.
4268 =item B<GetBusy> B<true>|B<false>
4270 If you set this option to true the busy time of all disks will be calculated
4271 and the value of the busiest disk in the system will be written.
4273 B<Note:> This is the same values that the NetApp CLI command "sysstat" returns
4274 in the "Disk util" field. Probably.
4276 Optional
4278 Type: boolean
4280 Default: true
4282 Result: One value list of type "percent" and type instance "disk_busy".
4284 =back
4286 =head3 The VolumePerf block
4288 This will collect various performance data about the individual volumes.
4290 You can select which data to collect about which volume using the following
4291 options. They follow the standard ignorelist semantic.
4293 B<Note:> To get this data the collectd user needs the
4294 I<api-perf-object-get-instances> capability.
4296 =over 4
4298 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
4300 Collect volume performance data every I<Seconds> seconds.
4302 =item B<GetIO> I<Volume>
4304 =item B<GetOps> I<Volume>
4306 =item B<GetLatency> I<Volume>
4308 Select the given volume for IO, operations or latency statistics collection.
4309 The argument is the name of the volume without the C</vol/> prefix.
4311 Since the standard ignorelist functionality is used here, you can use a string
4312 starting and ending with a slash to specify regular expression matching: To
4313 match the volumes "vol0", "vol2" and "vol7", you can use this regular
4314 expression:
4316 GetIO "/^vol[027]$/"
4318 If no regular expression is specified, an exact match is required. Both,
4319 regular and exact matching are case sensitive.
4321 If no volume was specified at all for either of the three options, that data
4322 will be collected for all available volumes.
4324 =item B<IgnoreSelectedIO> B<true>|B<false>
4326 =item B<IgnoreSelectedOps> B<true>|B<false>
4328 =item B<IgnoreSelectedLatency> B<true>|B<false>
4330 When set to B<true>, the volumes selected for IO, operations or latency
4331 statistics collection will be ignored and the data will be collected for all
4332 other volumes.
4334 When set to B<false>, data will only be collected for the specified volumes and
4335 all other volumes will be ignored.
4337 If no volumes have been specified with the above B<Get*> options, all volumes
4338 will be collected regardless of the B<IgnoreSelected*> option.
4340 Defaults to B<false>
4342 =back
4344 =head3 The VolumeUsage block
4346 This will collect capacity data about the individual volumes.
4348 B<Note:> To get this data the collectd user needs the I<api-volume-list-info>
4349 capability.
4351 =over 4
4353 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
4355 Collect volume usage statistics every I<Seconds> seconds.
4357 =item B<GetCapacity> I<VolumeName>
4359 The current capacity of the volume will be collected. This will result in two
4360 to four value lists, depending on the configuration of the volume. All data
4361 sources are of type "df_complex" with the name of the volume as
4362 plugin_instance.
4364 There will be type_instances "used" and "free" for the number of used and
4365 available bytes on the volume. If the volume has some space reserved for
4366 snapshots, a type_instance "snap_reserved" will be available. If the volume
4367 has SIS enabled, a type_instance "sis_saved" will be available. This is the
4368 number of bytes saved by the SIS feature.
4370 B<Note:> The current NetApp API has a bug that results in this value being
4371 reported as a 32E<nbsp>bit number. This plugin tries to guess the correct
4372 number which works most of the time. If you see strange values here, bug
4373 NetApp support to fix this.
4375 Repeat this option to specify multiple volumes.
4377 =item B<IgnoreSelectedCapacity> B<true>|B<false>
4379 Specify whether to collect only the volumes selected by the B<GetCapacity>
4380 option or to ignore those volumes. B<IgnoreSelectedCapacity> defaults to
4381 B<false>. However, if no B<GetCapacity> option is specified at all, all
4382 capacities will be selected anyway.
4384 =item B<GetSnapshot> I<VolumeName>
4386 Select volumes from which to collect snapshot information.
4388 Usually, the space used for snapshots is included in the space reported as
4389 "used". If snapshot information is collected as well, the space used for
4390 snapshots is subtracted from the used space.
4392 To make things even more interesting, it is possible to reserve space to be
4393 used for snapshots. If the space required for snapshots is less than that
4394 reserved space, there is "reserved free" and "reserved used" space in addition
4395 to "free" and "used". If the space required for snapshots exceeds the reserved
4396 space, that part allocated in the normal space is subtracted from the "used"
4397 space again.
4399 Repeat this option to specify multiple volumes.
4401 =item B<IgnoreSelectedSnapshot>
4403 Specify whether to collect only the volumes selected by the B<GetSnapshot>
4404 option or to ignore those volumes. B<IgnoreSelectedSnapshot> defaults to
4405 B<false>. However, if no B<GetSnapshot> option is specified at all, all
4406 capacities will be selected anyway.
4408 =back
4410 =head3 The Quota block
4412 This will collect (tree) quota statistics (used disk space and number of used
4413 files). This mechanism is useful to get usage information for single qtrees.
4414 In case the quotas are not used for any other purpose, an entry similar to the
4415 following in C</etc/quotas> would be sufficient:
4417 /vol/volA/some_qtree tree - - - - -
4419 After adding the entry, issue C<quota on -w volA> on the NetApp filer.
4421 =over 4
4423 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
4425 Collect SnapVault(R) statistics every I<Seconds> seconds.
4427 =back
4429 =head3 The SnapVault block
4431 This will collect statistics about the time and traffic of SnapVault(R)
4432 transfers.
4434 =over 4
4436 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
4438 Collect SnapVault(R) statistics every I<Seconds> seconds.
4440 =back
4442 =head2 Plugin C<netlink>
4444 The C<netlink> plugin uses a netlink socket to query the Linux kernel about
4445 statistics of various interface and routing aspects.
4447 =over 4
4449 =item B<Interface> I<Interface>
4451 =item B<VerboseInterface> I<Interface>
4453 Instruct the plugin to collect interface statistics. This is basically the same
4454 as the statistics provided by the C<interface> plugin (see above) but
4455 potentially much more detailed.
4457 When configuring with B<Interface> only the basic statistics will be collected,
4458 namely octets, packets, and errors. These statistics are collected by
4459 the C<interface> plugin, too, so using both at the same time is no benefit.
4461 When configured with B<VerboseInterface> all counters B<except> the basic ones,
4462 so that no data needs to be collected twice if you use the C<interface> plugin.
4463 This includes dropped packets, received multicast packets, collisions and a
4464 whole zoo of differentiated RX and TX errors. You can try the following command
4465 to get an idea of what awaits you:
4467 ip -s -s link list
4469 If I<Interface> is B<All>, all interfaces will be selected.
4471 =item B<QDisc> I<Interface> [I<QDisc>]
4473 =item B<Class> I<Interface> [I<Class>]
4475 =item B<Filter> I<Interface> [I<Filter>]
4477 Collect the octets and packets that pass a certain qdisc, class or filter.
4479 QDiscs and classes are identified by their type and handle (or classid).
4480 Filters don't necessarily have a handle, therefore the parent's handle is used.
4481 The notation used in collectd differs from that used in tc(1) in that it
4482 doesn't skip the major or minor number if it's zero and doesn't print special
4483 ids by their name. So, for example, a qdisc may be identified by
4484 C<pfifo_fast-1:0> even though the minor number of B<all> qdiscs is zero and
4485 thus not displayed by tc(1).
4487 If B<QDisc>, B<Class>, or B<Filter> is given without the second argument,
4488 i.E<nbsp>.e. without an identifier, all qdiscs, classes, or filters that are
4489 associated with that interface will be collected.
4491 Since a filter itself doesn't necessarily have a handle, the parent's handle is
4492 used. This may lead to problems when more than one filter is attached to a
4493 qdisc or class. This isn't nice, but we don't know how this could be done any
4494 better. If you have a idea, please don't hesitate to tell us.
4496 As with the B<Interface> option you can specify B<All> as the interface,
4497 meaning all interfaces.
4499 Here are some examples to help you understand the above text more easily:
4501 <Plugin netlink>
4502 VerboseInterface "All"
4503 QDisc "eth0" "pfifo_fast-1:0"
4504 QDisc "ppp0"
4505 Class "ppp0" "htb-1:10"
4506 Filter "ppp0" "u32-1:0"
4507 </Plugin>
4509 =item B<IgnoreSelected>
4511 The behavior is the same as with all other similar plugins: If nothing is
4512 selected at all, everything is collected. If some things are selected using the
4513 options described above, only these statistics are collected. If you set
4514 B<IgnoreSelected> to B<true>, this behavior is inverted, i.E<nbsp>e. the
4515 specified statistics will not be collected.
4517 =back
4519 =head2 Plugin C<network>
4521 The Network plugin sends data to a remote instance of collectd, receives data
4522 from a remote instance, or both at the same time. Data which has been received
4523 from the network is usually not transmitted again, but this can be activated, see
4524 the B<Forward> option below.
4526 The default IPv6 multicast group is C<ff18::efc0:4a42>. The default IPv4
4527 multicast group is C<239.192.74.66>. The default I<UDP> port is B<25826>.
4529 Both, B<Server> and B<Listen> can be used as single option or as block. When
4530 used as block, given options are valid for this socket only. The following
4531 example will export the metrics twice: Once to an "internal" server (without
4532 encryption and signing) and one to an external server (with cryptographic
4533 signature):
4535 <Plugin "network">
4536 # Export to an internal server
4537 # (demonstrates usage without additional options)
4538 Server "collectd.internal.tld"
4540 # Export to an external server
4541 # (demonstrates usage with signature options)
4542 <Server "collectd.external.tld">
4543 SecurityLevel "sign"
4544 Username "myhostname"
4545 Password "ohl0eQue"
4546 </Server>
4547 </Plugin>
4549 =over 4
4551 =item B<E<lt>Server> I<Host> [I<Port>]B<E<gt>>
4553 The B<Server> statement/block sets the server to send datagrams to. The
4554 statement may occur multiple times to send each datagram to multiple
4555 destinations.
4557 The argument I<Host> may be a hostname, an IPv4 address or an IPv6 address. The
4558 optional second argument specifies a port number or a service name. If not
4559 given, the default, B<25826>, is used.
4561 The following options are recognized within B<Server> blocks:
4563 =over 4
4565 =item B<SecurityLevel> B<Encrypt>|B<Sign>|B<None>
4567 Set the security you require for network communication. When the security level
4568 has been set to B<Encrypt>, data sent over the network will be encrypted using
4569 I<AES-256>. The integrity of encrypted packets is ensured using I<SHA-1>. When
4570 set to B<Sign>, transmitted data is signed using the I<HMAC-SHA-256> message
4571 authentication code. When set to B<None>, data is sent without any security.
4573 This feature is only available if the I<network> plugin was linked with
4574 I<libgcrypt>.
4576 =item B<Username> I<Username>
4578 Sets the username to transmit. This is used by the server to lookup the
4579 password. See B<AuthFile> below. All security levels except B<None> require
4580 this setting.
4582 This feature is only available if the I<network> plugin was linked with
4583 I<libgcrypt>.
4585 =item B<Password> I<Password>
4587 Sets a password (shared secret) for this socket. All security levels except
4588 B<None> require this setting.
4590 This feature is only available if the I<network> plugin was linked with
4591 I<libgcrypt>.
4593 =item B<Interface> I<Interface name>
4595 Set the outgoing interface for IP packets. This applies at least
4596 to IPv6 packets and if possible to IPv4. If this option is not applicable,
4597 undefined or a non-existent interface name is specified, the default
4598 behavior is to let the kernel choose the appropriate interface. Be warned
4599 that the manual selection of an interface for unicast traffic is only
4600 necessary in rare cases.
4602 =item B<ResolveInterval> I<Seconds>
4604 Sets the interval at which to re-resolve the DNS for the I<Host>. This is
4605 useful to force a regular DNS lookup to support a high availability setup. If
4606 not specified, re-resolves are never attempted.
4608 =back
4610 =item B<E<lt>Listen> I<Host> [I<Port>]B<E<gt>>
4612 The B<Listen> statement sets the interfaces to bind to. When multiple
4613 statements are found the daemon will bind to multiple interfaces.
4615 The argument I<Host> may be a hostname, an IPv4 address or an IPv6 address. If
4616 the argument is a multicast address the daemon will join that multicast group.
4617 The optional second argument specifies a port number or a service name. If not
4618 given, the default, B<25826>, is used.
4620 The following options are recognized within C<E<lt>ListenE<gt>> blocks:
4622 =over 4
4624 =item B<SecurityLevel> B<Encrypt>|B<Sign>|B<None>
4626 Set the security you require for network communication. When the security level
4627 has been set to B<Encrypt>, only encrypted data will be accepted. The integrity
4628 of encrypted packets is ensured using I<SHA-1>. When set to B<Sign>, only
4629 signed and encrypted data is accepted. When set to B<None>, all data will be
4630 accepted. If an B<AuthFile> option was given (see below), encrypted data is
4631 decrypted if possible.
4633 This feature is only available if the I<network> plugin was linked with
4634 I<libgcrypt>.
4636 =item B<AuthFile> I<Filename>
4638 Sets a file in which usernames are mapped to passwords. These passwords are
4639 used to verify signatures and to decrypt encrypted network packets. If
4640 B<SecurityLevel> is set to B<None>, this is optional. If given, signed data is
4641 verified and encrypted packets are decrypted. Otherwise, signed data is
4642 accepted without checking the signature and encrypted data cannot be decrypted.
4643 For the other security levels this option is mandatory.
4645 The file format is very simple: Each line consists of a username followed by a
4646 colon and any number of spaces followed by the password. To demonstrate, an
4647 example file could look like this:
4649 user0: foo
4650 user1: bar
4652 Each time a packet is received, the modification time of the file is checked
4653 using L<stat(2)>. If the file has been changed, the contents is re-read. While
4654 the file is being read, it is locked using L<fcntl(2)>.
4656 =item B<Interface> I<Interface name>
4658 Set the incoming interface for IP packets explicitly. This applies at least
4659 to IPv6 packets and if possible to IPv4. If this option is not applicable,
4660 undefined or a non-existent interface name is specified, the default
4661 behavior is, to let the kernel choose the appropriate interface. Thus incoming
4662 traffic gets only accepted, if it arrives on the given interface.
4664 =back
4666 =item B<TimeToLive> I<1-255>
4668 Set the time-to-live of sent packets. This applies to all, unicast and
4669 multicast, and IPv4 and IPv6 packets. The default is to not change this value.
4670 That means that multicast packets will be sent with a TTL of C<1> (one) on most
4671 operating systems.
4673 =item B<MaxPacketSize> I<1024-65535>
4675 Set the maximum size for datagrams received over the network. Packets larger
4676 than this will be truncated. Defaults to 1452E<nbsp>bytes, which is the maximum
4677 payload size that can be transmitted in one Ethernet frame using IPv6E<nbsp>/
4678 UDP.
4680 On the server side, this limit should be set to the largest value used on
4681 I<any> client. Likewise, the value on the client must not be larger than the
4682 value on the server, or data will be lost.
4684 B<Compatibility:> Versions prior to I<versionE<nbsp>4.8> used a fixed sized
4685 buffer of 1024E<nbsp>bytes. Versions I<4.8>, I<4.9> and I<4.10> used a default
4686 value of 1024E<nbsp>bytes to avoid problems when sending data to an older
4687 server.
4689 =item B<Forward> I<true|false>
4691 If set to I<true>, write packets that were received via the network plugin to
4692 the sending sockets. This should only be activated when the B<Listen>- and
4693 B<Server>-statements differ. Otherwise packets may be send multiple times to
4694 the same multicast group. While this results in more network traffic than
4695 necessary it's not a huge problem since the plugin has a duplicate detection,
4696 so the values will not loop.
4698 =item B<ReportStats> B<true>|B<false>
4700 The network plugin cannot only receive and send statistics, it can also create
4701 statistics about itself. Collectd data included the number of received and
4702 sent octets and packets, the length of the receive queue and the number of
4703 values handled. When set to B<true>, the I<Network plugin> will make these
4704 statistics available. Defaults to B<false>.
4706 =back
4708 =head2 Plugin C<nginx>
4710 This plugin collects the number of connections and requests handled by the
4711 C<nginx daemon> (speak: engineE<nbsp>X), a HTTP and mail server/proxy. It
4712 queries the page provided by the C<ngx_http_stub_status_module> module, which
4713 isn't compiled by default. Please refer to
4714 L<http://wiki.codemongers.com/NginxStubStatusModule> for more information on
4715 how to compile and configure nginx and this module.
4717 The following options are accepted by the C<nginx plugin>:
4719 =over 4
4721 =item B<URL> I<http://host/nginx_status>
4723 Sets the URL of the C<ngx_http_stub_status_module> output.
4725 =item B<User> I<Username>
4727 Optional user name needed for authentication.
4729 =item B<Password> I<Password>
4731 Optional password needed for authentication.
4733 =item B<VerifyPeer> B<true|false>
4735 Enable or disable peer SSL certificate verification. See
4736 L<http://curl.haxx.se/docs/sslcerts.html> for details. Enabled by default.
4738 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true|false>
4740 Enable or disable peer host name verification. If enabled, the plugin checks
4741 if the C<Common Name> or a C<Subject Alternate Name> field of the SSL
4742 certificate matches the host name provided by the B<URL> option. If this
4743 identity check fails, the connection is aborted. Obviously, only works when
4744 connecting to a SSL enabled server. Enabled by default.
4746 =item B<CACert> I<File>
4748 File that holds one or more SSL certificates. If you want to use HTTPS you will
4749 possibly need this option. What CA certificates come bundled with C<libcurl>
4750 and are checked by default depends on the distribution you use.
4752 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
4754 The B<Timeout> option sets the overall timeout for HTTP requests to B<URL>, in
4755 milliseconds. By default, the configured B<Interval> is used to set the
4756 timeout.
4758 =back
4760 =head2 Plugin C<notify_desktop>
4762 This plugin sends a desktop notification to a notification daemon, as defined
4763 in the Desktop Notification Specification. To actually display the
4764 notifications, B<notification-daemon> is required and B<collectd> has to be
4765 able to access the X server (i.E<nbsp>e., the C<DISPLAY> and C<XAUTHORITY>
4766 environment variables have to be set correctly) and the D-Bus message bus.
4768 The Desktop Notification Specification can be found at
4769 L<http://www.galago-project.org/specs/notification/>.
4771 =over 4
4773 =item B<OkayTimeout> I<timeout>
4775 =item B<WarningTimeout> I<timeout>
4777 =item B<FailureTimeout> I<timeout>
4779 Set the I<timeout>, in milliseconds, after which to expire the notification
4780 for C<OKAY>, C<WARNING> and C<FAILURE> severities respectively. If zero has
4781 been specified, the displayed notification will not be closed at all - the
4782 user has to do so herself. These options default to 5000. If a negative number
4783 has been specified, the default is used as well.
4785 =back
4787 =head2 Plugin C<notify_email>
4789 The I<notify_email> plugin uses the I<ESMTP> library to send notifications to a
4790 configured email address.
4792 I<libESMTP> is available from L<http://www.stafford.uklinux.net/libesmtp/>.
4794 Available configuration options:
4796 =over 4
4798 =item B<From> I<Address>
4800 Email address from which the emails should appear to come from.
4802 Default: C<root@localhost>
4804 =item B<Recipient> I<Address>
4806 Configures the email address(es) to which the notifications should be mailed.
4807 May be repeated to send notifications to multiple addresses.
4809 At least one B<Recipient> must be present for the plugin to work correctly.
4811 =item B<SMTPServer> I<Hostname>
4813 Hostname of the SMTP server to connect to.
4815 Default: C<localhost>
4817 =item B<SMTPPort> I<Port>
4819 TCP port to connect to.
4821 Default: C<25>
4823 =item B<SMTPUser> I<Username>
4825 Username for ASMTP authentication. Optional.
4827 =item B<SMTPPassword> I<Password>
4829 Password for ASMTP authentication. Optional.
4831 =item B<Subject> I<Subject>
4833 Subject-template to use when sending emails. There must be exactly two
4834 string-placeholders in the subject, given in the standard I<printf(3)> syntax,
4835 i.E<nbsp>e. C<%s>. The first will be replaced with the severity, the second
4836 with the hostname.
4838 Default: C<Collectd notify: %s@%s>
4840 =back
4842 =head2 Plugin C<notify_nagios>
4844 The I<notify_nagios> plugin writes notifications to Nagios' I<command file> as
4845 a I<passive service check result>.
4847 Available configuration options:
4849 =over 4
4851 =item B<CommandFile> I<Path>
4853 Sets the I<command file> to write to. Defaults to F</usr/local/nagios/var/rw/nagios.cmd>.
4855 =back
4857 =head2 Plugin C<ntpd>
4859 The C<ntpd> plugin collects per-peer ntp data such as time offset and time
4860 dispersion.
4862 For talking to B<ntpd>, it mimics what the B<ntpdc> control program does on
4863 the wire - using B<mode 7> specific requests. This mode is deprecated with
4864 newer B<ntpd> releases (4.2.7p230 and later). For the C<ntpd> plugin to work
4865 correctly with them, the ntp daemon must be explicitly configured to
4866 enable B<mode 7> (which is disabled by default). Refer to the I<ntp.conf(5)>
4867 manual page for details.
4869 Available configuration options for the C<ntpd> plugin:
4871 =over 4
4873 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
4875 Hostname of the host running B<ntpd>. Defaults to B<localhost>.
4877 =item B<Port> I<Port>
4879 UDP-Port to connect to. Defaults to B<123>.
4881 =item B<ReverseLookups> B<true>|B<false>
4883 Sets whether or not to perform reverse lookups on peers. Since the name or
4884 IP-address may be used in a filename it is recommended to disable reverse
4885 lookups. The default is to do reverse lookups to preserve backwards
4886 compatibility, though.
4888 =item B<IncludeUnitID> B<true>|B<false>
4890 When a peer is a refclock, include the unit ID in the I<type instance>.
4891 Defaults to B<false> for backward compatibility.
4893 If two refclock peers use the same driver and this is B<false>, the plugin will
4894 try to write simultaneous measurements from both to the same type instance.
4895 This will result in error messages in the log and only one set of measurements
4896 making it through.
4898 =back
4900 =head2 Plugin C<nut>
4902 =over 4
4904 =item B<UPS> I<upsname>B<@>I<hostname>[B<:>I<port>]
4906 Add a UPS to collect data from. The format is identical to the one accepted by
4907 L<upsc(8)>.
4909 =back
4911 =head2 Plugin C<olsrd>
4913 The I<olsrd> plugin connects to the TCP port opened by the I<txtinfo> plugin of
4914 the Optimized Link State Routing daemon and reads information about the current
4915 state of the meshed network.
4917 The following configuration options are understood:
4919 =over 4
4921 =item B<Host> I<Host>
4923 Connect to I<Host>. Defaults to B<"localhost">.
4925 =item B<Port> I<Port>
4927 Specifies the port to connect to. This must be a string, even if you give the
4928 port as a number rather than a service name. Defaults to B<"2006">.
4930 =item B<CollectLinks> B<No>|B<Summary>|B<Detail>
4932 Specifies what information to collect about links, i.E<nbsp>e. direct
4933 connections of the daemon queried. If set to B<No>, no information is
4934 collected. If set to B<Summary>, the number of links and the average of all
4935 I<link quality> (LQ) and I<neighbor link quality> (NLQ) values is calculated.
4936 If set to B<Detail> LQ and NLQ are collected per link.
4938 Defaults to B<Detail>.
4940 =item B<CollectRoutes> B<No>|B<Summary>|B<Detail>
4942 Specifies what information to collect about routes of the daemon queried. If
4943 set to B<No>, no information is collected. If set to B<Summary>, the number of
4944 routes and the average I<metric> and I<ETX> is calculated. If set to B<Detail>
4945 metric and ETX are collected per route.
4947 Defaults to B<Summary>.
4949 =item B<CollectTopology> B<No>|B<Summary>|B<Detail>
4951 Specifies what information to collect about the global topology. If set to
4952 B<No>, no information is collected. If set to B<Summary>, the number of links
4953 in the entire topology and the average I<link quality> (LQ) is calculated.
4954 If set to B<Detail> LQ and NLQ are collected for each link in the entire topology.
4956 Defaults to B<Summary>.
4958 =back
4960 =head2 Plugin C<onewire>
4962 B<EXPERIMENTAL!> See notes below.
4964 The C<onewire> plugin uses the B<owcapi> library from the B<owfs> project
4965 L<http://owfs.org/> to read sensors connected via the onewire bus.
4967 It can be used in two possible modes - standard or advanced.
4969 In the standard mode only temperature sensors (sensors with the family code
4970 C<10>, C<22> and C<28> - e.g. DS1820, DS18S20, DS1920) can be read. If you have
4971 other sensors you would like to have included, please send a sort request to
4972 the mailing list. You can select sensors to be read or to be ignored depending
4973 on the option B<IgnoreSelected>). When no list is provided the whole bus is
4974 walked and all sensors are read.
4976 Hubs (the DS2409 chips) are working, but read the note, why this plugin is
4977 experimental, below.
4979 In the advanced mode you can configure any sensor to be read (only numerical
4980 value) using full OWFS path (e.g. "/uncached/10.F10FCA000800/temperature").
4981 In this mode you have to list all the sensors. Neither default bus walk nor
4982 B<IgnoreSelected> are used here. Address and type (file) is extracted from
4983 the path automatically and should produce compatible structure with the "standard"
4984 mode (basically the path is expected as for example
4985 "/uncached/10.F10FCA000800/temperature" where it would extract address part
4986 "F10FCA000800" and the rest after the slash is considered the type - here
4987 "temperature").
4988 There are two advantages to this mode - you can access virtually any sensor
4989 (not just temperature), select whether to use cached or directly read values
4990 and it is slighlty faster. The downside is more complex configuration.
4992 The two modes are distinguished automatically by the format of the address.
4993 It is not possible to mix the two modes. Once a full path is detected in any
4994 B<Sensor> then the whole addressing (all sensors) is considered to be this way
4995 (and as standard addresses will fail parsing they will be ignored).
4997 =over 4
4999 =item B<Device> I<Device>
5001 Sets the device to read the values from. This can either be a "real" hardware
5002 device, such as a serial port or an USB port, or the address of the
5003 L<owserver(1)> socket, usually B<localhost:4304>.
5005 Though the documentation claims to automatically recognize the given address
5006 format, with versionE<nbsp>2.7p4 we had to specify the type explicitly. So
5007 with that version, the following configuration worked for us:
5009 <Plugin onewire>
5010 Device "-s localhost:4304"
5011 </Plugin>
5013 This directive is B<required> and does not have a default value.
5015 =item B<Sensor> I<Sensor>
5017 In the standard mode selects sensors to collect or to ignore
5018 (depending on B<IgnoreSelected>, see below). Sensors are specified without
5019 the family byte at the beginning, so you have to use for example C<F10FCA000800>,
5020 and B<not> include the leading C<10.> family byte and point.
5021 When no B<Sensor> is configured the whole Onewire bus is walked and all supported
5022 sensors (see above) are read.
5024 In the advanced mode the B<Sensor> specifies full OWFS path - e.g.
5025 C</uncached/10.F10FCA000800/temperature> (or when cached values are OK
5026 C</10.F10FCA000800/temperature>). B<IgnoreSelected> is not used.
5028 As there can be multiple devices on the bus you can list multiple sensor (use
5029 multiple B<Sensor> elements).
5031 =item B<IgnoreSelected> I<true>|I<false>
5033 If no configuration is given, the B<onewire> plugin will collect data from all
5034 sensors found. This may not be practical, especially if sensors are added and
5035 removed regularly. Sometimes, however, it's easier/preferred to collect only
5036 specific sensors or all sensors I<except> a few specified ones. This option
5037 enables you to do that: By setting B<IgnoreSelected> to I<true> the effect of
5038 B<Sensor> is inverted: All selected interfaces are ignored and all other
5039 interfaces are collected.
5041 Used only in the standard mode - see above.
5043 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
5045 Sets the interval in which all sensors should be read. If not specified, the
5046 global B<Interval> setting is used.
5048 =back
5050 B<EXPERIMENTAL!> The C<onewire> plugin is experimental, because it doesn't yet
5051 work with big setups. It works with one sensor being attached to one
5052 controller, but as soon as you throw in a couple more senors and maybe a hub
5053 or two, reading all values will take more than ten seconds (the default
5054 interval). We will probably add some separate thread for reading the sensors
5055 and some cache or something like that, but it's not done yet. We will try to
5056 maintain backwards compatibility in the future, but we can't promise. So in
5057 short: If it works for you: Great! But keep in mind that the config I<might>
5058 change, though this is unlikely. Oh, and if you want to help improving this
5059 plugin, just send a short notice to the mailing list. ThanksE<nbsp>:)
5061 =head2 Plugin C<openldap>
5063 To use the C<openldap> plugin you first need to configure the I<OpenLDAP>
5064 server correctly. The backend database C<monitor> needs to be loaded and
5065 working. See slapd-monitor(5) for the details.
5067 The configuration of the C<openldap> plugin consists of one or more B<Instance>
5068 blocks. Each block requires one string argument as the instance name. For
5069 example:
5071 <Plugin "openldap">
5072 <Instance "foo">
5073 URL "ldap://localhost/"
5074 </Instance>
5075 <Instance "bar">
5076 URL "ldaps://localhost/"
5077 </Instance>
5078 </Plugin>
5080 The instance name will be used as the I<plugin instance>. To emulate the old
5081 (versionE<nbsp>4) behavior, you can use an empty string (""). In order for the
5082 plugin to work correctly, each instance name must be unique. This is not
5083 enforced by the plugin and it is your responsibility to ensure it is.
5085 The following options are accepted within each B<Instance> block:
5087 =over 4
5089 =item B<URL> I<ldap://host/binddn>
5091 Sets the URL to use to connect to the I<OpenLDAP> server. This option is
5092 I<mandatory>.
5094 =item B<BindDN> I<BindDN>
5096 Name in the form of an LDAP distinguished name intended to be used for
5097 authentication. Defaults to empty string to establish an anonymous authorization.
5099 =item B<Password> I<Password>
5101 Password for simple bind authentication. If this option is not set,
5102 unauthenticated bind operation is used.
5104 =item B<StartTLS> B<true|false>
5106 Defines whether TLS must be used when connecting to the I<OpenLDAP> server.
5107 Disabled by default.
5109 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true|false>
5111 Enables or disables peer host name verification. If enabled, the plugin checks
5112 if the C<Common Name> or a C<Subject Alternate Name> field of the SSL
5113 certificate matches the host name provided by the B<URL> option. If this
5114 identity check fails, the connection is aborted. Enabled by default.
5116 =item B<CACert> I<File>
5118 File that holds one or more SSL certificates. If you want to use TLS/SSL you
5119 may possibly need this option. What CA certificates are checked by default
5120 depends on the distribution you use and can be changed with the usual ldap
5121 client configuration mechanisms. See ldap.conf(5) for the details.
5123 =item B<Timeout> I<Seconds>
5125 Sets the timeout value for ldap operations, in seconds. By default, the
5126 configured B<Interval> is used to set the timeout. Use B<-1> to disable
5127 (infinite timeout).
5129 =item B<Version> I<Version>
5131 An integer which sets the LDAP protocol version number to use when connecting
5132 to the I<OpenLDAP> server. Defaults to B<3> for using I<LDAPv3>.
5134 =back
5136 =head2 Plugin C<openvpn>
5138 The OpenVPN plugin reads a status file maintained by OpenVPN and gathers
5139 traffic statistics about connected clients.
5141 To set up OpenVPN to write to the status file periodically, use the
5142 B<--status> option of OpenVPN. Since OpenVPN can write two different formats,
5143 you need to set the required format, too. This is done by setting
5144 B<--status-version> to B<2>.
5146 So, in a nutshell you need:
5148 openvpn $OTHER_OPTIONS \
5149 --status "/var/run/openvpn-status" 10 \
5150 --status-version 2
5152 Available options:
5154 =over 4
5156 =item B<StatusFile> I<File>
5158 Specifies the location of the status file.
5160 =item B<ImprovedNamingSchema> B<true>|B<false>
5162 When enabled, the filename of the status file will be used as plugin instance
5163 and the client's "common name" will be used as type instance. This is required
5164 when reading multiple status files. Enabling this option is recommended, but to
5165 maintain backwards compatibility this option is disabled by default.
5167 =item B<CollectCompression> B<true>|B<false>
5169 Sets whether or not statistics about the compression used by OpenVPN should be
5170 collected. This information is only available in I<single> mode. Enabled by
5171 default.
5173 =item B<CollectIndividualUsers> B<true>|B<false>
5175 Sets whether or not traffic information is collected for each connected client
5176 individually. If set to false, currently no traffic data is collected at all
5177 because aggregating this data in a save manner is tricky. Defaults to B<true>.
5179 =item B<CollectUserCount> B<true>|B<false>
5181 When enabled, the number of currently connected clients or users is collected.
5182 This is especially interesting when B<CollectIndividualUsers> is disabled, but
5183 can be configured independently from that option. Defaults to B<false>.
5185 =back
5187 =head2 Plugin C<oracle>
5189 The "oracle" plugin uses the Oracle® Call Interface I<(OCI)> to connect to an
5190 Oracle® Database and lets you execute SQL statements there. It is very similar
5191 to the "dbi" plugin, because it was written around the same time. See the "dbi"
5192 plugin's documentation above for details.
5194 <Plugin oracle>
5195 <Query "out_of_stock">
5196 Statement "SELECT category, COUNT(*) AS value FROM products WHERE in_stock = 0 GROUP BY category"
5197 <Result>
5198 Type "gauge"
5199 # InstancePrefix "foo"
5200 InstancesFrom "category"
5201 ValuesFrom "value"
5202 </Result>
5203 </Query>
5204 <Database "product_information">
5205 ConnectID "db01"
5206 Username "oracle"
5207 Password "secret"
5208 Query "out_of_stock"
5209 </Database>
5210 </Plugin>
5212 =head3 B<Query> blocks
5214 The Query blocks are handled identically to the Query blocks of the "dbi"
5215 plugin. Please see its documentation above for details on how to specify
5216 queries.
5218 =head3 B<Database> blocks
5220 Database blocks define a connection to a database and which queries should be
5221 sent to that database. Each database needs a "name" as string argument in the
5222 starting tag of the block. This name will be used as "PluginInstance" in the
5223 values submitted to the daemon. Other than that, that name is not used.
5225 =over 4
5227 =item B<ConnectID> I<ID>
5229 Defines the "database alias" or "service name" to connect to. Usually, these
5230 names are defined in the file named C<$ORACLE_HOME/network/admin/tnsnames.ora>.
5232 =item B<Host> I<Host>
5234 Hostname to use when dispatching values for this database. Defaults to using
5235 the global hostname of the I<collectd> instance.
5237 =item B<Username> I<Username>
5239 Username used for authentication.
5241 =item B<Password> I<Password>
5243 Password used for authentication.
5245 =item B<Query> I<QueryName>
5247 Associates the query named I<QueryName> with this database connection. The
5248 query needs to be defined I<before> this statement, i.E<nbsp>e. all query
5249 blocks you want to refer to must be placed above the database block you want to
5250 refer to them from.
5252 =back
5254 =head2 Plugin C<perl>
5256 This plugin embeds a Perl-interpreter into collectd and provides an interface
5257 to collectd's plugin system. See L<collectd-perl(5)> for its documentation.
5259 =head2 Plugin C<pinba>
5261 The I<Pinba plugin> receives profiling information from I<Pinba>, an extension
5262 for the I<PHP> interpreter. At the end of executing a script, i.e. after a
5263 PHP-based webpage has been delivered, the extension will send a UDP packet
5264 containing timing information, peak memory usage and so on. The plugin will
5265 wait for such packets, parse them and account the provided information, which
5266 is then dispatched to the daemon once per interval.
5268 Synopsis:
5270 <Plugin pinba>
5271 Address "::0"
5272 Port "30002"
5273 # Overall statistics for the website.
5274 <View "www-total">
5275 Server "www.example.com"
5276 </View>
5277 # Statistics for www-a only
5278 <View "www-a">
5279 Host "www-a.example.com"
5280 Server "www.example.com"
5281 </View>
5282 # Statistics for www-b only
5283 <View "www-b">
5284 Host "www-b.example.com"
5285 Server "www.example.com"
5286 </View>
5287 </Plugin>
5289 The plugin provides the following configuration options:
5291 =over 4
5293 =item B<Address> I<Node>
5295 Configures the address used to open a listening socket. By default, plugin will
5296 bind to the I<any> address C<::0>.
5298 =item B<Port> I<Service>
5300 Configures the port (service) to bind to. By default the default Pinba port
5301 "30002" will be used. The option accepts service names in addition to port
5302 numbers and thus requires a I<string> argument.
5304 =item E<lt>B<View> I<Name>E<gt> block
5306 The packets sent by the Pinba extension include the hostname of the server, the
5307 server name (the name of the virtual host) and the script that was executed.
5308 Using B<View> blocks it is possible to separate the data into multiple groups
5309 to get more meaningful statistics. Each packet is added to all matching groups,
5310 so that a packet may be accounted for more than once.
5312 =over 4
5314 =item B<Host> I<Host>
5316 Matches the hostname of the system the webserver / script is running on. This
5317 will contain the result of the L<gethostname(2)> system call. If not
5318 configured, all hostnames will be accepted.
5320 =item B<Server> I<Server>
5322 Matches the name of the I<virtual host>, i.e. the contents of the
5323 C<$_SERVER["SERVER_NAME"]> variable when within PHP. If not configured, all
5324 server names will be accepted.
5326 =item B<Script> I<Script>
5328 Matches the name of the I<script name>, i.e. the contents of the
5329 C<$_SERVER["SCRIPT_NAME"]> variable when within PHP. If not configured, all
5330 script names will be accepted.
5332 =back
5334 =back
5336 =head2 Plugin C<ping>
5338 The I<Ping> plugin starts a new thread which sends ICMP "ping" packets to the
5339 configured hosts periodically and measures the network latency. Whenever the
5340 C<read> function of the plugin is called, it submits the average latency, the
5341 standard deviation and the drop rate for each host.
5343 Available configuration options:
5345 =over 4
5347 =item B<Host> I<IP-address>
5349 Host to ping periodically. This option may be repeated several times to ping
5350 multiple hosts.
5352 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
5354 Sets the interval in which to send ICMP echo packets to the configured hosts.
5355 This is B<not> the interval in which statistics are queries from the plugin but
5356 the interval in which the hosts are "pinged". Therefore, the setting here
5357 should be smaller than or equal to the global B<Interval> setting. Fractional
5358 times, such as "1.24" are allowed.
5360 Default: B<1.0>
5362 =item B<Timeout> I<Seconds>
5364 Time to wait for a response from the host to which an ICMP packet had been
5365 sent. If a reply was not received after I<Seconds> seconds, the host is assumed
5366 to be down or the packet to be dropped. This setting must be smaller than the
5367 B<Interval> setting above for the plugin to work correctly. Fractional
5368 arguments are accepted.
5370 Default: B<0.9>
5372 =item B<TTL> I<0-255>
5374 Sets the Time-To-Live of generated ICMP packets.
5376 =item B<Size> I<size>
5378 Sets the size of the data payload in ICMP packet to specified I<size> (it
5379 will be filled with regular ASCII pattern). If not set, default 56 byte
5380 long string is used so that the packet size of an ICMPv4 packet is exactly
5381 64 bytes, similar to the behaviour of normal ping(1) command.
5383 =item B<SourceAddress> I<host>
5385 Sets the source address to use. I<host> may either be a numerical network
5386 address or a network hostname.
5388 =item B<Device> I<name>
5390 Sets the outgoing network device to be used. I<name> has to specify an
5391 interface name (e.E<nbsp>g. C<eth0>). This might not be supported by all
5392 operating systems.
5394 =item B<MaxMissed> I<Packets>
5396 Trigger a DNS resolve after the host has not replied to I<Packets> packets. This
5397 enables the use of dynamic DNS services (like dyndns.org) with the ping plugin.
5399 Default: B<-1> (disabled)
5401 =back
5403 =head2 Plugin C<postgresql>
5405 The C<postgresql> plugin queries statistics from PostgreSQL databases. It
5406 keeps a persistent connection to all configured databases and tries to
5407 reconnect if the connection has been interrupted. A database is configured by
5408 specifying a B<Database> block as described below. The default statistics are
5409 collected from PostgreSQL's B<statistics collector> which thus has to be
5410 enabled for this plugin to work correctly. This should usually be the case by
5411 default. See the section "The Statistics Collector" of the B<PostgreSQL
5412 Documentation> for details.
5414 By specifying custom database queries using a B<Query> block as described
5415 below, you may collect any data that is available from some PostgreSQL
5416 database. This way, you are able to access statistics of external daemons
5417 which are available in a PostgreSQL database or use future or special
5418 statistics provided by PostgreSQL without the need to upgrade your collectd
5419 installation.
5421 Starting with version 5.2, the C<postgresql> plugin supports writing data to
5422 PostgreSQL databases as well. This has been implemented in a generic way. You
5423 need to specify an SQL statement which will then be executed by collectd in
5424 order to write the data (see below for details). The benefit of that approach
5425 is that there is no fixed database layout. Rather, the layout may be optimized
5426 for the current setup.
5428 The B<PostgreSQL Documentation> manual can be found at
5429 L<http://www.postgresql.org/docs/manuals/>.
5431 <Plugin postgresql>
5432 <Query magic>
5433 Statement "SELECT magic FROM wizard WHERE host = $1;"
5434 Param hostname
5435 <Result>
5436 Type gauge
5437 InstancePrefix "magic"
5438 ValuesFrom magic
5439 </Result>
5440 </Query>
5442 <Query rt36_tickets>
5443 Statement "SELECT COUNT(type) AS count, type \
5444 FROM (SELECT CASE \
5445 WHEN resolved = 'epoch' THEN 'open' \
5446 ELSE 'resolved' END AS type \
5447 FROM tickets) type \
5448 GROUP BY type;"
5449 <Result>
5450 Type counter
5451 InstancePrefix "rt36_tickets"
5452 InstancesFrom "type"
5453 ValuesFrom "count"
5454 </Result>
5455 </Query>
5457 <Writer sqlstore>
5458 Statement "SELECT collectd_insert($1, $2, $3, $4, $5, $6, $7, $8, $9);"
5459 StoreRates true
5460 </Writer>
5462 <Database foo>
5463 Host "hostname"
5464 Port "5432"
5465 User "username"
5466 Password "secret"
5467 SSLMode "prefer"
5468 KRBSrvName "kerberos_service_name"
5469 Query magic
5470 </Database>
5472 <Database bar>
5473 Interval 300
5474 Service "service_name"
5475 Query backend # predefined
5476 Query rt36_tickets
5477 </Database>
5479 <Database qux>
5480 # ...
5481 Writer sqlstore
5482 CommitInterval 10
5483 </Database>
5484 </Plugin>
5486 The B<Query> block defines one database query which may later be used by a
5487 database definition. It accepts a single mandatory argument which specifies
5488 the name of the query. The names of all queries have to be unique (see the
5489 B<MinVersion> and B<MaxVersion> options below for an exception to this
5490 rule).
5492 In each B<Query> block, there is one or more B<Result> blocks. Multiple
5493 B<Result> blocks may be used to extract multiple values from a single query.
5495 The following configuration options are available to define the query:
5497 =over 4
5499 =item B<Statement> I<sql query statement>
5501 Specify the I<sql query statement> which the plugin should execute. The string
5502 may contain the tokens B<$1>, B<$2>, etc. which are used to reference the
5503 first, second, etc. parameter. The value of the parameters is specified by the
5504 B<Param> configuration option - see below for details. To include a literal
5505 B<$> character followed by a number, surround it with single quotes (B<'>).
5507 Any SQL command which may return data (such as C<SELECT> or C<SHOW>) is
5508 allowed. Note, however, that only a single command may be used. Semicolons are
5509 allowed as long as a single non-empty command has been specified only.
5511 The returned lines will be handled separately one after another.
5513 =item B<Param> I<hostname>|I<database>|I<instance>|I<username>|I<interval>
5515 Specify the parameters which should be passed to the SQL query. The parameters
5516 are referred to in the SQL query as B<$1>, B<$2>, etc. in the same order as
5517 they appear in the configuration file. The value of the parameter is
5518 determined depending on the value of the B<Param> option as follows:
5520 =over 4
5522 =item I<hostname>
5524 The configured hostname of the database connection. If a UNIX domain socket is
5525 used, the parameter expands to "localhost".
5527 =item I<database>
5529 The name of the database of the current connection.
5531 =item I<instance>
5533 The name of the database plugin instance. See the B<Instance> option of the
5534 database specification below for details.
5536 =item I<username>
5538 The username used to connect to the database.
5540 =item I<interval>
5542 The interval with which this database is queried (as specified by the database
5543 specific or global B<Interval> options).
5545 =back
5547 Please note that parameters are only supported by PostgreSQL's protocol
5548 version 3 and above which was introduced in version 7.4 of PostgreSQL.
5550 =item B<PluginInstanceFrom> I<column>
5552 Specify how to create the "PluginInstance" for reporting this query results.
5553 Only one column is supported. You may concatenate fields and string values in
5554 the query statement to get the required results.
5556 =item B<MinVersion> I<version>
5558 =item B<MaxVersion> I<version>
5560 Specify the minimum or maximum version of PostgreSQL that this query should be
5561 used with. Some statistics might only be available with certain versions of
5562 PostgreSQL. This allows you to specify multiple queries with the same name but
5563 which apply to different versions, thus allowing you to use the same
5564 configuration in a heterogeneous environment.
5566 The I<version> has to be specified as the concatenation of the major, minor
5567 and patch-level versions, each represented as two-decimal-digit numbers. For
5568 example, version 8.2.3 will become 80203.
5570 =back
5572 The B<Result> block defines how to handle the values returned from the query.
5573 It defines which column holds which value and how to dispatch that value to
5574 the daemon.
5576 =over 4
5578 =item B<Type> I<type>
5580 The I<type> name to be used when dispatching the values. The type describes
5581 how to handle the data and where to store it. See L<types.db(5)> for more
5582 details on types and their configuration. The number and type of values (as
5583 selected by the B<ValuesFrom> option) has to match the type of the given name.
5585 This option is mandatory.
5587 =item B<InstancePrefix> I<prefix>
5589 =item B<InstancesFrom> I<column0> [I<column1> ...]
5591 Specify how to create the "TypeInstance" for each data set (i.E<nbsp>e. line).
5592 B<InstancePrefix> defines a static prefix that will be prepended to all type
5593 instances. B<InstancesFrom> defines the column names whose values will be used
5594 to create the type instance. Multiple values will be joined together using the
5595 hyphen (C<->) as separation character.
5597 The plugin itself does not check whether or not all built instances are
5598 different. It is your responsibility to assure that each is unique.
5600 Both options are optional. If none is specified, the type instance will be
5601 empty.
5603 =item B<ValuesFrom> I<column0> [I<column1> ...]
5605 Names the columns whose content is used as the actual data for the data sets
5606 that are dispatched to the daemon. How many such columns you need is
5607 determined by the B<Type> setting as explained above. If you specify too many
5608 or not enough columns, the plugin will complain about that and no data will be
5609 submitted to the daemon.
5611 The actual data type, as seen by PostgreSQL, is not that important as long as
5612 it represents numbers. The plugin will automatically cast the values to the
5613 right type if it know how to do that. For that, it uses the L<strtoll(3)> and
5614 L<strtod(3)> functions, so anything supported by those functions is supported
5615 by the plugin as well.
5617 This option is required inside a B<Result> block and may be specified multiple
5618 times. If multiple B<ValuesFrom> options are specified, the columns are read
5619 in the given order.
5621 =back
5623 The following predefined queries are available (the definitions can be found
5624 in the F<postgresql_default.conf> file which, by default, is available at
5625 C<I<prefix>/share/collectd/>):
5627 =over 4
5629 =item B<backends>
5631 This query collects the number of backends, i.E<nbsp>e. the number of
5632 connected clients.
5634 =item B<transactions>
5636 This query collects the numbers of committed and rolled-back transactions of
5637 the user tables.
5639 =item B<queries>
5641 This query collects the numbers of various table modifications (i.E<nbsp>e.
5642 insertions, updates, deletions) of the user tables.
5644 =item B<query_plans>
5646 This query collects the numbers of various table scans and returned tuples of
5647 the user tables.
5649 =item B<table_states>
5651 This query collects the numbers of live and dead rows in the user tables.
5653 =item B<disk_io>
5655 This query collects disk block access counts for user tables.
5657 =item B<disk_usage>
5659 This query collects the on-disk size of the database in bytes.
5661 =back
5663 In addition, the following detailed queries are available by default. Please
5664 note that each of those queries collects information B<by table>, thus,
5665 potentially producing B<a lot> of data. For details see the description of the
5666 non-by_table queries above.
5668 =over 4
5670 =item B<queries_by_table>
5672 =item B<query_plans_by_table>
5674 =item B<table_states_by_table>
5676 =item B<disk_io_by_table>
5678 =back
5680 The B<Writer> block defines a PostgreSQL writer backend. It accepts a single
5681 mandatory argument specifying the name of the writer. This will then be used
5682 in the B<Database> specification in order to activate the writer instance. The
5683 names of all writers have to be unique. The following options may be
5684 specified:
5686 =over 4
5688 =item B<Statement> I<sql statement>
5690 This mandatory option specifies the SQL statement that will be executed for
5691 each submitted value. A single SQL statement is allowed only. Anything after
5692 the first semicolon will be ignored.
5694 Nine parameters will be passed to the statement and should be specified as
5695 tokens B<$1>, B<$2>, through B<$9> in the statement string. The following
5696 values are made available through those parameters:
5698 =over 4
5700 =item B<$1>
5702 The timestamp of the queried value as a floating point number.
5704 =item B<$2>
5706 The hostname of the queried value.
5708 =item B<$3>
5710 The plugin name of the queried value.
5712 =item B<$4>
5714 The plugin instance of the queried value. This value may be B<NULL> if there
5715 is no plugin instance.
5717 =item B<$5>
5719 The type of the queried value (cf. L<types.db(5)>).
5721 =item B<$6>
5723 The type instance of the queried value. This value may be B<NULL> if there is
5724 no type instance.
5726 =item B<$7>
5728 An array of names for the submitted values (i.E<nbsp>e., the name of the data
5729 sources of the submitted value-list).
5731 =item B<$8>
5733 An array of types for the submitted values (i.E<nbsp>e., the type of the data
5734 sources of the submitted value-list; C<counter>, C<gauge>, ...). Note, that if
5735 B<StoreRates> is enabled (which is the default, see below), all types will be
5736 C<gauge>.
5738 =item B<$9>
5740 An array of the submitted values. The dimensions of the value name and value
5741 arrays match.
5743 =back
5745 In general, it is advisable to create and call a custom function in the
5746 PostgreSQL database for this purpose. Any procedural language supported by
5747 PostgreSQL will do (see chapter "Server Programming" in the PostgreSQL manual
5748 for details).
5750 =item B<StoreRates> B<false>|B<true>
5752 If set to B<true> (the default), convert counter values to rates. If set to
5753 B<false> counter values are stored as is, i.E<nbsp>e. as an increasing integer
5754 number.
5756 =back
5758 The B<Database> block defines one PostgreSQL database for which to collect
5759 statistics. It accepts a single mandatory argument which specifies the
5760 database name. None of the other options are required. PostgreSQL will use
5761 default values as documented in the section "CONNECTING TO A DATABASE" in the
5762 L<psql(1)> manpage. However, be aware that those defaults may be influenced by
5763 the user collectd is run as and special environment variables. See the manpage
5764 for details.
5766 =over 4
5768 =item B<Interval> I<seconds>
5770 Specify the interval with which the database should be queried. The default is
5771 to use the global B<Interval> setting.
5773 =item B<CommitInterval> I<seconds>
5775 This option may be used for database connections which have "writers" assigned
5776 (see above). If specified, it causes a writer to put several updates into a
5777 single transaction. This transaction will last for the specified amount of
5778 time. By default, each update will be executed in a separate transaction. Each
5779 transaction generates a fair amount of overhead which can, thus, be reduced by
5780 activating this option. The draw-back is, that data covering the specified
5781 amount of time will be lost, for example, if a single statement within the
5782 transaction fails or if the database server crashes.
5784 =item B<Instance> I<name>
5786 Specify the plugin instance name that should be used instead of the database
5787 name (which is the default, if this option has not been specified). This
5788 allows one to query multiple databases of the same name on the same host (e.g.
5789 when running multiple database server versions in parallel).
5790 The plugin instance name can also be set from the query result using
5791 the B<PluginInstanceFrom> option in B<Query> block.
5793 =item B<Host> I<hostname>
5795 Specify the hostname or IP of the PostgreSQL server to connect to. If the
5796 value begins with a slash, it is interpreted as the directory name in which to
5797 look for the UNIX domain socket.
5799 This option is also used to determine the hostname that is associated with a
5800 collected data set. If it has been omitted or either begins with with a slash
5801 or equals B<localhost> it will be replaced with the global hostname definition
5802 of collectd. Any other value will be passed literally to collectd when
5803 dispatching values. Also see the global B<Hostname> and B<FQDNLookup> options.
5805 =item B<Port> I<port>
5807 Specify the TCP port or the local UNIX domain socket file extension of the
5808 server.
5810 =item B<User> I<username>
5812 Specify the username to be used when connecting to the server.
5814 =item B<Password> I<password>
5816 Specify the password to be used when connecting to the server.
5818 =item B<ExpireDelay> I<delay>
5820 Skip expired values in query output.
5822 =item B<SSLMode> I<disable>|I<allow>|I<prefer>|I<require>
5824 Specify whether to use an SSL connection when contacting the server. The
5825 following modes are supported:
5827 =over 4
5829 =item I<disable>
5831 Do not use SSL at all.
5833 =item I<allow>
5835 First, try to connect without using SSL. If that fails, try using SSL.
5837 =item I<prefer> (default)
5839 First, try to connect using SSL. If that fails, try without using SSL.
5841 =item I<require>
5843 Use SSL only.
5845 =back
5847 =item B<Instance> I<name>
5849 Specify the plugin instance name that should be used instead of the database
5850 name (which is the default, if this option has not been specified). This
5851 allows one to query multiple databases of the same name on the same host (e.g.
5852 when running multiple database server versions in parallel).
5854 =item B<KRBSrvName> I<kerberos_service_name>
5856 Specify the Kerberos service name to use when authenticating with Kerberos 5
5857 or GSSAPI. See the sections "Kerberos authentication" and "GSSAPI" of the
5858 B<PostgreSQL Documentation> for details.
5860 =item B<Service> I<service_name>
5862 Specify the PostgreSQL service name to use for additional parameters. That
5863 service has to be defined in F<pg_service.conf> and holds additional
5864 connection parameters. See the section "The Connection Service File" in the
5865 B<PostgreSQL Documentation> for details.
5867 =item B<Query> I<query>
5869 Specifies a I<query> which should be executed in the context of the database
5870 connection. This may be any of the predefined or user-defined queries. If no
5871 such option is given, it defaults to "backends", "transactions", "queries",
5872 "query_plans", "table_states", "disk_io" and "disk_usage" (unless a B<Writer>
5873 has been specified). Else, the specified queries are used only.
5875 =item B<Writer> I<writer>
5877 Assigns the specified I<writer> backend to the database connection. This
5878 causes all collected data to be send to the database using the settings
5879 defined in the writer configuration (see the section "FILTER CONFIGURATION"
5880 below for details on how to selectively send data to certain plugins).
5882 Each writer will register a flush callback which may be used when having long
5883 transactions enabled (see the B<CommitInterval> option above). When issuing
5884 the B<FLUSH> command (see L<collectd-unixsock(5)> for details) the current
5885 transaction will be committed right away. Two different kinds of flush
5886 callbacks are available with the C<postgresql> plugin:
5888 =over 4
5890 =item B<postgresql>
5892 Flush all writer backends.
5894 =item B<postgresql->I<database>
5896 Flush all writers of the specified I<database> only.
5898 =back
5900 =back
5902 =head2 Plugin C<powerdns>
5904 The C<powerdns> plugin queries statistics from an authoritative PowerDNS
5905 nameserver and/or a PowerDNS recursor. Since both offer a wide variety of
5906 values, many of which are probably meaningless to most users, but may be useful
5907 for some. So you may chose which values to collect, but if you don't, some
5908 reasonable defaults will be collected.
5910 <Plugin "powerdns">
5911 <Server "server_name">
5912 Collect "latency"
5913 Collect "udp-answers" "udp-queries"
5914 Socket "/var/run/pdns.controlsocket"
5915 </Server>
5916 <Recursor "recursor_name">
5917 Collect "questions"
5918 Collect "cache-hits" "cache-misses"
5919 Socket "/var/run/pdns_recursor.controlsocket"
5920 </Recursor>
5921 LocalSocket "/opt/collectd/var/run/collectd-powerdns"
5922 </Plugin>
5924 =over 4
5926 =item B<Server> and B<Recursor> block
5928 The B<Server> block defines one authoritative server to query, the B<Recursor>
5929 does the same for an recursing server. The possible options in both blocks are
5930 the same, though. The argument defines a name for the serverE<nbsp>/ recursor
5931 and is required.
5933 =over 4
5935 =item B<Collect> I<Field>
5937 Using the B<Collect> statement you can select which values to collect. Here,
5938 you specify the name of the values as used by the PowerDNS servers, e.E<nbsp>g.
5939 C<dlg-only-drops>, C<answers10-100>.
5941 The method of getting the values differs for B<Server> and B<Recursor> blocks:
5942 When querying the server a C<SHOW *> command is issued in any case, because
5943 that's the only way of getting multiple values out of the server at once.
5944 collectd then picks out the values you have selected. When querying the
5945 recursor, a command is generated to query exactly these values. So if you
5946 specify invalid fields when querying the recursor, a syntax error may be
5947 returned by the daemon and collectd may not collect any values at all.
5949 If no B<Collect> statement is given, the following B<Server> values will be
5950 collected:
5952 =over 4
5954 =item latency
5956 =item packetcache-hit
5958 =item packetcache-miss
5960 =item packetcache-size
5962 =item query-cache-hit
5964 =item query-cache-miss
5966 =item recursing-answers
5968 =item recursing-questions
5970 =item tcp-answers
5972 =item tcp-queries
5974 =item udp-answers
5976 =item udp-queries
5978 =back
5980 The following B<Recursor> values will be collected by default:
5982 =over 4
5984 =item noerror-answers
5986 =item nxdomain-answers
5988 =item servfail-answers
5990 =item sys-msec
5992 =item user-msec
5994 =item qa-latency
5996 =item cache-entries
5998 =item cache-hits
6000 =item cache-misses
6002 =item questions
6004 =back
6006 Please note that up to that point collectd doesn't know what values are
6007 available on the server and values that are added do not need a change of the
6008 mechanism so far. However, the values must be mapped to collectd's naming
6009 scheme, which is done using a lookup table that lists all known values. If
6010 values are added in the future and collectd does not know about them, you will
6011 get an error much like this:
6013 powerdns plugin: submit: Not found in lookup table: foobar = 42
6015 In this case please file a bug report with the collectd team.
6017 =item B<Socket> I<Path>
6019 Configures the path to the UNIX domain socket to be used when connecting to the
6020 daemon. By default C<${localstatedir}/run/pdns.controlsocket> will be used for
6021 an authoritative server and C<${localstatedir}/run/pdns_recursor.controlsocket>
6022 will be used for the recursor.
6024 =back
6026 =item B<LocalSocket> I<Path>
6028 Querying the recursor is done using UDP. When using UDP over UNIX domain
6029 sockets, the client socket needs a name in the file system, too. You can set
6030 this local name to I<Path> using the B<LocalSocket> option. The default is
6031 C<I<prefix>/var/run/collectd-powerdns>.
6033 =back
6035 =head2 Plugin C<processes>
6037 =over 4
6039 =item B<Process> I<Name>
6041 Select more detailed statistics of processes matching this name. The statistics
6042 collected for these selected processes are size of the resident segment size
6043 (RSS), user- and system-time used, number of processes and number of threads,
6044 io data (where available) and minor and major pagefaults.
6046 Some platforms have a limit on the length of process names. I<Name> must stay
6047 below this limit.
6049 =item B<ProcessMatch> I<name> I<regex>
6051 Similar to the B<Process> option this allows one to select more detailed
6052 statistics of processes matching the specified I<regex> (see L<regex(7)> for
6053 details). The statistics of all matching processes are summed up and
6054 dispatched to the daemon using the specified I<name> as an identifier. This
6055 allows one to "group" several processes together. I<name> must not contain
6056 slashes.
6058 =item B<CollectContextSwitch> I<Boolean>
6060 Collect context switch of the process.
6062 =back
6064 =head2 Plugin C<protocols>
6066 Collects a lot of information about various network protocols, such as I<IP>,
6067 I<TCP>, I<UDP>, etc.
6069 Available configuration options:
6071 =over 4
6073 =item B<Value> I<Selector>
6075 Selects whether or not to select a specific value. The string being matched is
6076 of the form "I<Protocol>:I<ValueName>", where I<Protocol> will be used as the
6077 plugin instance and I<ValueName> will be used as type instance. An example of
6078 the string being used would be C<Tcp:RetransSegs>.
6080 You can use regular expressions to match a large number of values with just one
6081 configuration option. To select all "extended" I<TCP> values, you could use the
6082 following statement:
6084 Value "/^TcpExt:/"
6086 Whether only matched values are selected or all matched values are ignored
6087 depends on the B<IgnoreSelected>. By default, only matched values are selected.
6088 If no value is configured at all, all values will be selected.
6090 =item B<IgnoreSelected> B<true>|B<false>
6092 If set to B<true>, inverts the selection made by B<Value>, i.E<nbsp>e. all
6093 matching values will be ignored.
6095 =back
6097 =head2 Plugin C<python>
6099 This plugin embeds a Python-interpreter into collectd and provides an interface
6100 to collectd's plugin system. See L<collectd-python(5)> for its documentation.
6102 =head2 Plugin C<routeros>
6104 The C<routeros> plugin connects to a device running I<RouterOS>, the
6105 Linux-based operating system for routers by I<MikroTik>. The plugin uses
6106 I<librouteros> to connect and reads information about the interfaces and
6107 wireless connections of the device. The configuration supports querying
6108 multiple routers:
6110 <Plugin "routeros">
6111 <Router>
6112 Host "router0.example.com"
6113 User "collectd"
6114 Password "secr3t"
6115 CollectInterface true
6116 CollectCPULoad true
6117 CollectMemory true
6118 </Router>
6119 <Router>
6120 Host "router1.example.com"
6121 User "collectd"
6122 Password "5ecret"
6123 CollectInterface true
6124 CollectRegistrationTable true
6125 CollectDF true
6126 CollectDisk true
6127 </Router>
6128 </Plugin>
6130 As you can see above, the configuration of the I<routeros> plugin consists of
6131 one or more B<E<lt>RouterE<gt>> blocks. Within each block, the following
6132 options are understood:
6134 =over 4
6136 =item B<Host> I<Host>
6138 Hostname or IP-address of the router to connect to.
6140 =item B<Port> I<Port>
6142 Port name or port number used when connecting. If left unspecified, the default
6143 will be chosen by I<librouteros>, currently "8728". This option expects a
6144 string argument, even when a numeric port number is given.
6146 =item B<User> I<User>
6148 Use the user name I<User> to authenticate. Defaults to "admin".
6150 =item B<Password> I<Password>
6152 Set the password used to authenticate.
6154 =item B<CollectInterface> B<true>|B<false>
6156 When set to B<true>, interface statistics will be collected for all interfaces
6157 present on the device. Defaults to B<false>.
6159 =item B<CollectRegistrationTable> B<true>|B<false>
6161 When set to B<true>, information about wireless LAN connections will be
6162 collected. Defaults to B<false>.
6164 =item B<CollectCPULoad> B<true>|B<false>
6166 When set to B<true>, information about the CPU usage will be collected. The
6167 number is a dimensionless value where zero indicates no CPU usage at all.
6168 Defaults to B<false>.
6170 =item B<CollectMemory> B<true>|B<false>
6172 When enabled, the amount of used and free memory will be collected. How used
6173 memory is calculated is unknown, for example whether or not caches are counted
6174 as used space.
6175 Defaults to B<false>.
6177 =item B<CollectDF> B<true>|B<false>
6179 When enabled, the amount of used and free disk space will be collected.
6180 Defaults to B<false>.
6182 =item B<CollectDisk> B<true>|B<false>
6184 When enabled, the number of sectors written and bad blocks will be collected.
6185 Defaults to B<false>.
6187 =back
6189 =head2 Plugin C<redis>
6191 The I<Redis plugin> connects to one or more Redis servers and gathers
6192 information about each server's state. For each server there is a I<Node> block
6193 which configures the connection parameters for this node.
6195 <Plugin redis>
6196 <Node "example">
6197 Host "localhost"
6198 Port "6379"
6199 Timeout 2000
6200 <Query "LLEN myqueue">
6201 Type "queue_length"
6202 Instance "myqueue"
6203 <Query>
6204 </Node>
6205 </Plugin>
6207 The information shown in the synopsis above is the I<default configuration>
6208 which is used by the plugin if no configuration is present.
6210 =over 4
6212 =item B<Node> I<Nodename>
6214 The B<Node> block identifies a new Redis node, that is a new Redis instance
6215 running in an specified host and port. The name for node is a canonical
6216 identifier which is used as I<plugin instance>. It is limited to
6217 64E<nbsp>characters in length.
6219 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
6221 The B<Host> option is the hostname or IP-address where the Redis instance is
6222 running on.
6224 =item B<Port> I<Port>
6226 The B<Port> option is the TCP port on which the Redis instance accepts
6227 connections. Either a service name of a port number may be given. Please note
6228 that numerical port numbers must be given as a string, too.
6230 =item B<Password> I<Password>
6232 Use I<Password> to authenticate when connecting to I<Redis>.
6234 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
6236 The B<Timeout> option set the socket timeout for node response. Since the Redis
6237 read function is blocking, you should keep this value as low as possible. Keep
6238 in mind that the sum of all B<Timeout> values for all B<Nodes> should be lower
6239 than B<Interval> defined globally.
6241 =item B<Query> I<Querystring>
6243 The B<Query> block identifies a query to execute against the redis server.
6244 There may be an arbitrary number of queries to execute.
6246 =item B<Type> I<Collectd type>
6248 Within a query definition, a valid collectd type to use as when submitting
6249 the result of the query. When not supplied, will default to B<gauge>.
6251 =item B<Instance> I<Type instance>
6253 Within a query definition, an optional type instance to use when submitting
6254 the result of the query. When not supplied will default to the escaped
6255 command, up to 64 chars.
6257 =back
6259 =head2 Plugin C<rrdcached>
6261 The C<rrdcached> plugin uses the RRDtool accelerator daemon, L<rrdcached(1)>,
6262 to store values to RRD files in an efficient manner. The combination of the
6263 C<rrdcached> B<plugin> and the C<rrdcached> B<daemon> is very similar to the
6264 way the C<rrdtool> plugin works (see below). The added abstraction layer
6265 provides a number of benefits, though: Because the cache is not within
6266 C<collectd> anymore, it does not need to be flushed when C<collectd> is to be
6267 restarted. This results in much shorter (if any) gaps in graphs, especially
6268 under heavy load. Also, the C<rrdtool> command line utility is aware of the
6269 daemon so that it can flush values to disk automatically when needed. This
6270 allows one to integrate automated flushing of values into graphing solutions
6271 much more easily.
6273 There are disadvantages, though: The daemon may reside on a different host, so
6274 it may not be possible for C<collectd> to create the appropriate RRD files
6275 anymore. And even if C<rrdcached> runs on the same host, it may run in a
6276 different base directory, so relative paths may do weird stuff if you're not
6277 careful.
6279 So the B<recommended configuration> is to let C<collectd> and C<rrdcached> run
6280 on the same host, communicating via a UNIX domain socket. The B<DataDir>
6281 setting should be set to an absolute path, so that a changed base directory
6282 does not result in RRD files being createdE<nbsp>/ expected in the wrong place.
6284 =over 4
6286 =item B<DaemonAddress> I<Address>
6288 Address of the daemon as understood by the C<rrdc_connect> function of the RRD
6289 library. See L<rrdcached(1)> for details. Example:
6291 <Plugin "rrdcached">
6292 DaemonAddress "unix:/var/run/rrdcached.sock"
6293 </Plugin>
6295 =item B<DataDir> I<Directory>
6297 Set the base directory in which the RRD files reside. If this is a relative
6298 path, it is relative to the working base directory of the C<rrdcached> daemon!
6299 Use of an absolute path is recommended.
6301 =item B<CreateFiles> B<true>|B<false>
6303 Enables or disables the creation of RRD files. If the daemon is not running
6304 locally, or B<DataDir> is set to a relative path, this will not work as
6305 expected. Default is B<true>.
6307 =item B<CreateFilesAsync> B<false>|B<true>
6309 When enabled, new RRD files are enabled asynchronously, using a separate thread
6310 that runs in the background. This prevents writes to block, which is a problem
6311 especially when many hundreds of files need to be created at once. However,
6312 since the purpose of creating the files asynchronously is I<not> to block until
6313 the file is available, values before the file is available will be discarded.
6314 When disabled (the default) files are created synchronously, blocking for a
6315 short while, while the file is being written.
6317 =item B<StepSize> I<Seconds>
6319 B<Force> the stepsize of newly created RRD-files. Ideally (and per default)
6320 this setting is unset and the stepsize is set to the interval in which the data
6321 is collected. Do not use this option unless you absolutely have to for some
6322 reason. Setting this option may cause problems with the C<snmp plugin>, the
6323 C<exec plugin> or when the daemon is set up to receive data from other hosts.
6325 =item B<HeartBeat> I<Seconds>
6327 B<Force> the heartbeat of newly created RRD-files. This setting should be unset
6328 in which case the heartbeat is set to twice the B<StepSize> which should equal
6329 the interval in which data is collected. Do not set this option unless you have
6330 a very good reason to do so.
6332 =item B<RRARows> I<NumRows>
6334 The C<rrdtool plugin> calculates the number of PDPs per CDP based on the
6335 B<StepSize>, this setting and a timespan. This plugin creates RRD-files with
6336 three times five RRAs, i. e. five RRAs with the CFs B<MIN>, B<AVERAGE>, and
6337 B<MAX>. The five RRAs are optimized for graphs covering one hour, one day, one
6338 week, one month, and one year.
6340 So for each timespan, it calculates how many PDPs need to be consolidated into
6341 one CDP by calculating:
6342 number of PDPs = timespan / (stepsize * rrarows)
6344 Bottom line is, set this no smaller than the width of you graphs in pixels. The
6345 default is 1200.
6347 =item B<RRATimespan> I<Seconds>
6349 Adds an RRA-timespan, given in seconds. Use this option multiple times to have
6350 more then one RRA. If this option is never used, the built-in default of (3600,
6351 86400, 604800, 2678400, 31622400) is used.
6353 For more information on how RRA-sizes are calculated see B<RRARows> above.
6355 =item B<XFF> I<Factor>
6357 Set the "XFiles Factor". The default is 0.1. If unsure, don't set this option.
6358 I<Factor> must be in the range C<[0.0-1.0)>, i.e. between zero (inclusive) and
6359 one (exclusive).
6361 =item B<CollectStatistics> B<false>|B<true>
6363 When set to B<true>, various statistics about the I<rrdcached> daemon will be
6364 collected, with "rrdcached" as the I<plugin name>. Defaults to B<false>.
6366 Statistics are read via I<rrdcached>s socket using the STATS command.
6367 See L<rrdcached(1)> for details.
6369 =back
6371 =head2 Plugin C<rrdtool>
6373 You can use the settings B<StepSize>, B<HeartBeat>, B<RRARows>, and B<XFF> to
6374 fine-tune your RRD-files. Please read L<rrdcreate(1)> if you encounter problems
6375 using these settings. If you don't want to dive into the depths of RRDtool, you
6376 can safely ignore these settings.
6378 =over 4
6380 =item B<DataDir> I<Directory>
6382 Set the directory to store RRD files under. By default RRD files are generated
6383 beneath the daemon's working directory, i.e. the B<BaseDir>.
6385 =item B<CreateFilesAsync> B<false>|B<true>
6387 When enabled, new RRD files are enabled asynchronously, using a separate thread
6388 that runs in the background. This prevents writes to block, which is a problem
6389 especially when many hundreds of files need to be created at once. However,
6390 since the purpose of creating the files asynchronously is I<not> to block until
6391 the file is available, values before the file is available will be discarded.
6392 When disabled (the default) files are created synchronously, blocking for a
6393 short while, while the file is being written.
6395 =item B<StepSize> I<Seconds>
6397 B<Force> the stepsize of newly created RRD-files. Ideally (and per default)
6398 this setting is unset and the stepsize is set to the interval in which the data
6399 is collected. Do not use this option unless you absolutely have to for some
6400 reason. Setting this option may cause problems with the C<snmp plugin>, the
6401 C<exec plugin> or when the daemon is set up to receive data from other hosts.
6403 =item B<HeartBeat> I<Seconds>
6405 B<Force> the heartbeat of newly created RRD-files. This setting should be unset
6406 in which case the heartbeat is set to twice the B<StepSize> which should equal
6407 the interval in which data is collected. Do not set this option unless you have
6408 a very good reason to do so.
6410 =item B<RRARows> I<NumRows>
6412 The C<rrdtool plugin> calculates the number of PDPs per CDP based on the
6413 B<StepSize>, this setting and a timespan. This plugin creates RRD-files with
6414 three times five RRAs, i.e. five RRAs with the CFs B<MIN>, B<AVERAGE>, and
6415 B<MAX>. The five RRAs are optimized for graphs covering one hour, one day, one
6416 week, one month, and one year.
6418 So for each timespan, it calculates how many PDPs need to be consolidated into
6419 one CDP by calculating:
6420 number of PDPs = timespan / (stepsize * rrarows)
6422 Bottom line is, set this no smaller than the width of you graphs in pixels. The
6423 default is 1200.
6425 =item B<RRATimespan> I<Seconds>
6427 Adds an RRA-timespan, given in seconds. Use this option multiple times to have
6428 more then one RRA. If this option is never used, the built-in default of (3600,
6429 86400, 604800, 2678400, 31622400) is used.
6431 For more information on how RRA-sizes are calculated see B<RRARows> above.
6433 =item B<XFF> I<Factor>
6435 Set the "XFiles Factor". The default is 0.1. If unsure, don't set this option.
6436 I<Factor> must be in the range C<[0.0-1.0)>, i.e. between zero (inclusive) and
6437 one (exclusive).
6439 =item B<CacheFlush> I<Seconds>
6441 When the C<rrdtool> plugin uses a cache (by setting B<CacheTimeout>, see below)
6442 it writes all values for a certain RRD-file if the oldest value is older than
6443 (or equal to) the number of seconds specified. If some RRD-file is not updated
6444 anymore for some reason (the computer was shut down, the network is broken,
6445 etc.) some values may still be in the cache. If B<CacheFlush> is set, then the
6446 entire cache is searched for entries older than B<CacheTimeout> seconds and
6447 written to disk every I<Seconds> seconds. Since this is kind of expensive and
6448 does nothing under normal circumstances, this value should not be too small.
6449 900 seconds might be a good value, though setting this to 7200 seconds doesn't
6450 normally do much harm either.
6452 =item B<CacheTimeout> I<Seconds>
6454 If this option is set to a value greater than zero, the C<rrdtool plugin> will
6455 save values in a cache, as described above. Writing multiple values at once
6456 reduces IO-operations and thus lessens the load produced by updating the files.
6457 The trade off is that the graphs kind of "drag behind" and that more memory is
6458 used.
6460 =item B<WritesPerSecond> I<Updates>
6462 When collecting many statistics with collectd and the C<rrdtool> plugin, you
6463 will run serious performance problems. The B<CacheFlush> setting and the
6464 internal update queue assert that collectd continues to work just fine even
6465 under heavy load, but the system may become very unresponsive and slow. This is
6466 a problem especially if you create graphs from the RRD files on the same
6467 machine, for example using the C<graph.cgi> script included in the
6468 C<contrib/collection3/> directory.
6470 This setting is designed for very large setups. Setting this option to a value
6471 between 25 and 80 updates per second, depending on your hardware, will leave
6472 the server responsive enough to draw graphs even while all the cached values
6473 are written to disk. Flushed values, i.E<nbsp>e. values that are forced to disk
6474 by the B<FLUSH> command, are B<not> effected by this limit. They are still
6475 written as fast as possible, so that web frontends have up to date data when
6476 generating graphs.
6478 For example: If you have 100,000 RRD files and set B<WritesPerSecond> to 30
6479 updates per second, writing all values to disk will take approximately
6480 56E<nbsp>minutes. Together with the flushing ability that's integrated into
6481 "collection3" you'll end up with a responsive and fast system, up to date
6482 graphs and basically a "backup" of your values every hour.
6484 =item B<RandomTimeout> I<Seconds>
6486 When set, the actual timeout for each value is chosen randomly between
6487 I<CacheTimeout>-I<RandomTimeout> and I<CacheTimeout>+I<RandomTimeout>. The
6488 intention is to avoid high load situations that appear when many values timeout
6489 at the same time. This is especially a problem shortly after the daemon starts,
6490 because all values were added to the internal cache at roughly the same time.
6492 =back
6494 =head2 Plugin C<sensors>
6496 The I<Sensors plugin> uses B<lm_sensors> to retrieve sensor-values. This means
6497 that all the needed modules have to be loaded and lm_sensors has to be
6498 configured (most likely by editing F</etc/sensors.conf>. Read
6499 L<sensors.conf(5)> for details.
6501 The B<lm_sensors> homepage can be found at
6502 L<http://secure.netroedge.com/~lm78/>.
6504 =over 4
6506 =item B<SensorConfigFile> I<File>
6508 Read the I<lm_sensors> configuration from I<File>. When unset (recommended),
6509 the library's default will be used.
6511 =item B<Sensor> I<chip-bus-address/type-feature>
6513 Selects the name of the sensor which you want to collect or ignore, depending
6514 on the B<IgnoreSelected> below. For example, the option "B<Sensor>
6515 I<it8712-isa-0290/voltage-in1>" will cause collectd to gather data for the
6516 voltage sensor I<in1> of the I<it8712> on the isa bus at the address 0290.
6518 =item B<IgnoreSelected> I<true>|I<false>
6520 If no configuration if given, the B<sensors>-plugin will collect data from all
6521 sensors. This may not be practical, especially for uninteresting sensors.
6522 Thus, you can use the B<Sensor>-option to pick the sensors you're interested
6523 in. Sometimes, however, it's easier/preferred to collect all sensors I<except> a
6524 few ones. This option enables you to do that: By setting B<IgnoreSelected> to
6525 I<true> the effect of B<Sensor> is inverted: All selected sensors are ignored
6526 and all other sensors are collected.
6528 =item B<UseLabels> I<true>|I<false>
6530 Configures how sensor readings are reported. When set to I<true>, sensor
6531 readings are reported using their descriptive label (e.g. "VCore"). When set to
6532 I<false> (the default) the sensor name is used ("in0").
6534 =back
6536 =head2 Plugin C<sigrok>
6538 The I<sigrok plugin> uses I<libsigrok> to retrieve measurements from any device
6539 supported by the L<sigrok|http://sigrok.org/> project.
6541 B<Synopsis>
6543 <Plugin sigrok>
6544 LogLevel 3
6545 <Device "AC Voltage">
6546 Driver "fluke-dmm"
6547 MinimumInterval 10
6548 Conn "/dev/ttyUSB2"
6549 </Device>
6550 <Device "Sound Level">
6551 Driver "cem-dt-885x"
6552 Conn "/dev/ttyUSB1"
6553 </Device>
6554 </Plugin>
6556 =over 4
6558 =item B<LogLevel> B<0-5>
6560 The I<sigrok> logging level to pass on to the I<collectd> log, as a number
6561 between B<0> and B<5> (inclusive). These levels correspond to C<None>,
6562 C<Errors>, C<Warnings>, C<Informational>, C<Debug >and C<Spew>, respectively.
6563 The default is B<2> (C<Warnings>). The I<sigrok> log messages, regardless of
6564 their level, are always submitted to I<collectd> at its INFO log level.
6566 =item E<lt>B<Device> I<Name>E<gt>
6568 A sigrok-supported device, uniquely identified by this section's options. The
6569 I<Name> is passed to I<collectd> as the I<plugin instance>.
6571 =item B<Driver> I<DriverName>
6573 The sigrok driver to use for this device.
6575 =item B<Conn> I<ConnectionSpec>
6577 If the device cannot be auto-discovered, or more than one might be discovered
6578 by the driver, I<ConnectionSpec> specifies the connection string to the device.
6579 It can be of the form of a device path (e.g.E<nbsp>C</dev/ttyUSB2>), or, in
6580 case of a non-serial USB-connected device, the USB I<VendorID>B<.>I<ProductID>
6581 separated by a period (e.g.E<nbsp>C<0403.6001>). A USB device can also be
6582 specified as I<Bus>B<.>I<Address> (e.g.E<nbsp>C<1.41>).
6584 =item B<SerialComm> I<SerialSpec>
6586 For serial devices with non-standard port settings, this option can be used
6587 to specify them in a form understood by I<sigrok>, e.g.E<nbsp>C<9600/8n1>.
6588 This should not be necessary; drivers know how to communicate with devices they
6589 support.
6591 =item B<MinimumInterval> I<Seconds>
6593 Specifies the minimum time between measurement dispatches to I<collectd>, in
6594 seconds. Since some I<sigrok> supported devices can acquire measurements many
6595 times per second, it may be necessary to throttle these. For example, the
6596 I<RRD plugin> cannot process writes more than once per second.
6598 The default B<MinimumInterval> is B<0>, meaning measurements received from the
6599 device are always dispatched to I<collectd>. When throttled, unused
6600 measurements are discarded.
6602 =back
6604 =head2 Plugin C<smart>
6606 The C<smart> plugin collects SMART information from physical
6607 disks. Values collectd include temperature, power cycle count, poweron
6608 time and bad sectors. Also, all SMART attributes are collected along
6609 with the normalized current value, the worst value, the threshold and
6610 a human readable value.
6612 Using the following two options you can ignore some disks or configure the
6613 collection only of specific disks.
6615 =over 4
6617 =item B<Disk> I<Name>
6619 Select the disk I<Name>. Whether it is collected or ignored depends on the
6620 B<IgnoreSelected> setting, see below. As with other plugins that use the
6621 daemon's ignorelist functionality, a string that starts and ends with a slash
6622 is interpreted as a regular expression. Examples:
6624 Disk "sdd"
6625 Disk "/hda[34]/"
6627 =item B<IgnoreSelected> B<true>|B<false>
6629 Sets whether selected disks, i.E<nbsp>e. the ones matches by any of the B<Disk>
6630 statements, are ignored or if all other disks are ignored. The behavior
6631 (hopefully) is intuitive: If no B<Disk> option is configured, all disks are
6632 collected. If at least one B<Disk> option is given and no B<IgnoreSelected> or
6633 set to B<false>, B<only> matching disks will be collected. If B<IgnoreSelected>
6634 is set to B<true>, all disks are collected B<except> the ones matched.
6636 =item B<IgnoreSleepMode> B<true>|B<false>
6638 Normally, the C<smart> plugin will ignore disks that are reported to be asleep.
6639 This option disables the sleep mode check and allows the plugin to collect data
6640 from these disks anyway. This is useful in cases where libatasmart mistakenly
6641 reports disks as asleep because it has not been updated to incorporate support
6642 for newer idle states in the ATA spec.
6644 =item B<UseSerial> B<true>|B<false>
6646 A disk's kernel name (e.g., sda) can change from one boot to the next. If this
6647 option is enabled, the C<smart> plugin will use the disk's serial number (e.g.,
6648 HGST_HUH728080ALE600_2EJ8VH8X) instead of the kernel name as the key for
6649 storing data. This ensures that the data for a given disk will be kept together
6650 even if the kernel name changes.
6652 =back
6654 =head2 Plugin C<snmp>
6656 Since the configuration of the C<snmp plugin> is a little more complicated than
6657 other plugins, its documentation has been moved to an own manpage,
6658 L<collectd-snmp(5)>. Please see there for details.
6660 =head2 Plugin C<statsd>
6662 The I<statsd plugin> listens to a UDP socket, reads "events" in the statsd
6663 protocol and dispatches rates or other aggregates of these numbers
6664 periodically.
6666 The plugin implements the I<Counter>, I<Timer>, I<Gauge> and I<Set> types which
6667 are dispatched as the I<collectd> types C<derive>, C<latency>, C<gauge> and
6668 C<objects> respectively.
6670 The following configuration options are valid:
6672 =over 4
6674 =item B<Host> I<Host>
6676 Bind to the hostname / address I<Host>. By default, the plugin will bind to the
6677 "any" address, i.e. accept packets sent to any of the hosts addresses.
6679 =item B<Port> I<Port>
6681 UDP port to listen to. This can be either a service name or a port number.
6682 Defaults to C<8125>.
6684 =item B<DeleteCounters> B<false>|B<true>
6686 =item B<DeleteTimers> B<false>|B<true>
6688 =item B<DeleteGauges> B<false>|B<true>
6690 =item B<DeleteSets> B<false>|B<true>
6692 These options control what happens if metrics are not updated in an interval.
6693 If set to B<False>, the default, metrics are dispatched unchanged, i.e. the
6694 rate of counters and size of sets will be zero, timers report C<NaN> and gauges
6695 are unchanged. If set to B<True>, the such metrics are not dispatched and
6696 removed from the internal cache.
6698 =item B<CounterSum> B<false>|B<true>
6700 When enabled, creates a C<count> metric which reports the change since the last
6701 read. This option primarily exists for compatibility with the I<statsd>
6702 implementation by Etsy.
6704 =item B<TimerPercentile> I<Percent>
6706 Calculate and dispatch the configured percentile, i.e. compute the latency, so
6707 that I<Percent> of all reported timers are smaller than or equal to the
6708 computed latency. This is useful for cutting off the long tail latency, as it's
6709 often done in I<Service Level Agreements> (SLAs).
6711 Different percentiles can be calculated by setting this option several times.
6712 If none are specified, no percentiles are calculated / dispatched.
6714 =item B<TimerLower> B<false>|B<true>
6716 =item B<TimerUpper> B<false>|B<true>
6718 =item B<TimerSum> B<false>|B<true>
6720 =item B<TimerCount> B<false>|B<true>
6722 Calculate and dispatch various values out of I<Timer> metrics received during
6723 an interval. If set to B<False>, the default, these values aren't calculated /
6724 dispatched.
6726 =back
6728 =head2 Plugin C<swap>
6730 The I<Swap plugin> collects information about used and available swap space. On
6731 I<Linux> and I<Solaris>, the following options are available:
6733 =over 4
6735 =item B<ReportByDevice> B<false>|B<true>
6737 Configures how to report physical swap devices. If set to B<false> (the
6738 default), the summary over all swap devices is reported only, i.e. the globally
6739 used and available space over all devices. If B<true> is configured, the used
6740 and available space of each device will be reported separately.
6742 This option is only available if the I<Swap plugin> can read C</proc/swaps>
6743 (under Linux) or use the L<swapctl(2)> mechanism (under I<Solaris>).
6745 =item B<ReportBytes> B<false>|B<true>
6747 When enabled, the I<swap I/O> is reported in bytes. When disabled, the default,
6748 I<swap I/O> is reported in pages. This option is available under Linux only.
6750 =item B<ValuesAbsolute> B<true>|B<false>
6752 Enables or disables reporting of absolute swap metrics, i.e. number of I<bytes>
6753 available and used. Defaults to B<true>.
6755 =item B<ValuesPercentage> B<false>|B<true>
6757 Enables or disables reporting of relative swap metrics, i.e. I<percent>
6758 available and free. Defaults to B<false>.
6760 This is useful for deploying I<collectd> in a heterogeneous environment, where
6761 swap sizes differ and you want to specify generic thresholds or similar.
6763 =back
6765 =head2 Plugin C<syslog>
6767 =over 4
6769 =item B<LogLevel> B<debug|info|notice|warning|err>
6771 Sets the log-level. If, for example, set to B<notice>, then all events with
6772 severity B<notice>, B<warning>, or B<err> will be submitted to the
6773 syslog-daemon.
6775 Please note that B<debug> is only available if collectd has been compiled with
6776 debugging support.
6778 =item B<NotifyLevel> B<OKAY>|B<WARNING>|B<FAILURE>
6780 Controls which notifications should be sent to syslog. The default behaviour is
6781 not to send any. Less severe notifications always imply logging more severe
6782 notifications: Setting this to B<OKAY> means all notifications will be sent to
6783 syslog, setting this to B<WARNING> will send B<WARNING> and B<FAILURE>
6784 notifications but will dismiss B<OKAY> notifications. Setting this option to
6785 B<FAILURE> will only send failures to syslog.
6787 =back
6789 =head2 Plugin C<table>
6791 The C<table plugin> provides generic means to parse tabular data and dispatch
6792 user specified values. Values are selected based on column numbers. For
6793 example, this plugin may be used to get values from the Linux L<proc(5)>
6794 filesystem or CSV (comma separated values) files.
6796 <Plugin table>
6797 <Table "/proc/slabinfo">
6798 Instance "slabinfo"
6799 Separator " "
6800 <Result>
6801 Type gauge
6802 InstancePrefix "active_objs"
6803 InstancesFrom 0
6804 ValuesFrom 1
6805 </Result>
6806 <Result>
6807 Type gauge
6808 InstancePrefix "objperslab"
6809 InstancesFrom 0
6810 ValuesFrom 4
6811 </Result>
6812 </Table>
6813 </Plugin>
6815 The configuration consists of one or more B<Table> blocks, each of which
6816 configures one file to parse. Within each B<Table> block, there are one or
6817 more B<Result> blocks, which configure which data to select and how to
6818 interpret it.
6820 The following options are available inside a B<Table> block:
6822 =over 4
6824 =item B<Instance> I<instance>
6826 If specified, I<instance> is used as the plugin instance. So, in the above
6827 example, the plugin name C<table-slabinfo> would be used. If omitted, the
6828 filename of the table is used instead, with all special characters replaced
6829 with an underscore (C<_>).
6831 =item B<Separator> I<string>
6833 Any character of I<string> is interpreted as a delimiter between the different
6834 columns of the table. A sequence of two or more contiguous delimiters in the
6835 table is considered to be a single delimiter, i.E<nbsp>e. there cannot be any
6836 empty columns. The plugin uses the L<strtok_r(3)> function to parse the lines
6837 of a table - see its documentation for more details. This option is mandatory.
6839 A horizontal tab, newline and carriage return may be specified by C<\\t>,
6840 C<\\n> and C<\\r> respectively. Please note that the double backslashes are
6841 required because of collectd's config parsing.
6843 =back
6845 The following options are available inside a B<Result> block:
6847 =over 4
6849 =item B<Type> I<type>
6851 Sets the type used to dispatch the values to the daemon. Detailed information
6852 about types and their configuration can be found in L<types.db(5)>. This
6853 option is mandatory.
6855 =item B<InstancePrefix> I<prefix>
6857 If specified, prepend I<prefix> to the type instance. If omitted, only the
6858 B<InstancesFrom> option is considered for the type instance.
6860 =item B<InstancesFrom> I<column0> [I<column1> ...]
6862 If specified, the content of the given columns (identified by the column
6863 number starting at zero) will be used to create the type instance for each
6864 row. Multiple values (and the instance prefix) will be joined together with
6865 dashes (I<->) as separation character. If omitted, only the B<InstancePrefix>
6866 option is considered for the type instance.
6868 The plugin itself does not check whether or not all built instances are
6869 different. It’s your responsibility to assure that each is unique. This is
6870 especially true, if you do not specify B<InstancesFrom>: B<You> have to make
6871 sure that the table only contains one row.
6873 If neither B<InstancePrefix> nor B<InstancesFrom> is given, the type instance
6874 will be empty.
6876 =item B<ValuesFrom> I<column0> [I<column1> ...]
6878 Specifies the columns (identified by the column numbers starting at zero)
6879 whose content is used as the actual data for the data sets that are dispatched
6880 to the daemon. How many such columns you need is determined by the B<Type>
6881 setting above. If you specify too many or not enough columns, the plugin will
6882 complain about that and no data will be submitted to the daemon. The plugin
6883 uses L<strtoll(3)> and L<strtod(3)> to parse counter and gauge values
6884 respectively, so anything supported by those functions is supported by the
6885 plugin as well. This option is mandatory.
6887 =back
6889 =head2 Plugin C<tail>
6891 The C<tail plugin> follows logfiles, just like L<tail(1)> does, parses
6892 each line and dispatches found values. What is matched can be configured by the
6893 user using (extended) regular expressions, as described in L<regex(7)>.
6895 <Plugin "tail">
6896 <File "/var/log/exim4/mainlog">
6897 Instance "exim"
6898 Interval 60
6899 <Match>
6900 Regex "S=([1-9][0-9]*)"
6901 DSType "CounterAdd"
6902 Type "ipt_bytes"
6903 Instance "total"
6904 </Match>
6905 <Match>
6906 Regex "\\<R=local_user\\>"
6907 ExcludeRegex "\\<R=local_user\\>.*mail_spool defer"
6908 DSType "CounterInc"
6909 Type "counter"
6910 Instance "local_user"
6911 </Match>
6912 </File>
6913 </Plugin>
6915 The config consists of one or more B<File> blocks, each of which configures one
6916 logfile to parse. Within each B<File> block, there are one or more B<Match>
6917 blocks, which configure a regular expression to search for.
6919 The B<Instance> option in the B<File> block may be used to set the plugin
6920 instance. So in the above example the plugin name C<tail-foo> would be used.
6921 This plugin instance is for all B<Match> blocks that B<follow> it, until the
6922 next B<Instance> option. This way you can extract several plugin instances from
6923 one logfile, handy when parsing syslog and the like.
6925 The B<Interval> option allows you to define the length of time between reads. If
6926 this is not set, the default Interval will be used.
6928 Each B<Match> block has the following options to describe how the match should
6929 be performed:
6931 =over 4
6933 =item B<Regex> I<regex>
6935 Sets the regular expression to use for matching against a line. The first
6936 subexpression has to match something that can be turned into a number by
6937 L<strtoll(3)> or L<strtod(3)>, depending on the value of C<CounterAdd>, see
6938 below. Because B<extended> regular expressions are used, you do not need to use
6939 backslashes for subexpressions! If in doubt, please consult L<regex(7)>. Due to
6940 collectd's config parsing you need to escape backslashes, though. So if you
6941 want to match literal parentheses you need to do the following:
6943 Regex "SPAM \\(Score: (-?[0-9]+\\.[0-9]+)\\)"
6945 =item B<ExcludeRegex> I<regex>
6947 Sets an optional regular expression to use for excluding lines from the match.
6948 An example which excludes all connections from localhost from the match:
6950 ExcludeRegex "127\\.0\\.0\\.1"
6952 =item B<DSType> I<Type>
6954 Sets how the values are cumulated. I<Type> is one of:
6956 =over 4
6958 =item B<GaugeAverage>
6960 Calculate the average.
6962 =item B<GaugeMin>
6964 Use the smallest number only.
6966 =item B<GaugeMax>
6968 Use the greatest number only.
6970 =item B<GaugeLast>
6972 Use the last number found.
6974 =item B<CounterSet>
6976 =item B<DeriveSet>
6978 =item B<AbsoluteSet>
6980 The matched number is a counter. Simply I<sets> the internal counter to this
6981 value. Variants exist for C<COUNTER>, C<DERIVE>, and C<ABSOLUTE> data sources.
6983 =item B<GaugeAdd>
6985 =item B<CounterAdd>
6987 =item B<DeriveAdd>
6989 Add the matched value to the internal counter. In case of B<DeriveAdd>, the
6990 matched number may be negative, which will effectively subtract from the
6991 internal counter.
6993 =item B<GaugeInc>
6995 =item B<CounterInc>
6997 =item B<DeriveInc>
6999 Increase the internal counter by one. These B<DSType> are the only ones that do
7000 not use the matched subexpression, but simply count the number of matched
7001 lines. Thus, you may use a regular expression without submatch in this case.
7003 =back
7005 As you'd expect the B<Gauge*> types interpret the submatch as a floating point
7006 number, using L<strtod(3)>. The B<Counter*> and B<AbsoluteSet> types interpret
7007 the submatch as an unsigned integer using L<strtoull(3)>. The B<Derive*> types
7008 interpret the submatch as a signed integer using L<strtoll(3)>. B<CounterInc>
7009 and B<DeriveInc> do not use the submatch at all and it may be omitted in this
7010 case.
7012 =item B<Type> I<Type>
7014 Sets the type used to dispatch this value. Detailed information about types and
7015 their configuration can be found in L<types.db(5)>.
7017 =item B<Instance> I<TypeInstance>
7019 This optional setting sets the type instance to use.
7021 =back
7023 =head2 Plugin C<tail_csv>
7025 The I<tail_csv plugin> reads files in the CSV format, e.g. the statistics file
7026 written by I<Snort>.
7028 B<Synopsis:>
7030 <Plugin "tail_csv">
7031 <Metric "snort-dropped">
7032 Type "percent"
7033 Instance "dropped"
7034 Index 1
7035 </Metric>
7036 <File "/var/log/snort/snort.stats">
7037 Instance "snort-eth0"
7038 Interval 600
7039 Collect "snort-dropped"
7040 </File>
7041 </Plugin>
7043 The configuration consists of one or more B<Metric> blocks that define an index
7044 into the line of the CSV file and how this value is mapped to I<collectd's>
7045 internal representation. These are followed by one or more B<Instance> blocks
7046 which configure which file to read, in which interval and which metrics to
7047 extract.
7049 =over 4
7051 =item E<lt>B<Metric> I<Name>E<gt>
7053 The B<Metric> block configures a new metric to be extracted from the statistics
7054 file and how it is mapped on I<collectd's> data model. The string I<Name> is
7055 only used inside the B<Instance> blocks to refer to this block, so you can use
7056 one B<Metric> block for multiple CSV files.
7058 =over 4
7060 =item B<Type> I<Type>
7062 Configures which I<Type> to use when dispatching this metric. Types are defined
7063 in the L<types.db(5)> file, see the appropriate manual page for more
7064 information on specifying types. Only types with a single I<data source> are
7065 supported by the I<tail_csv plugin>. The information whether the value is an
7066 absolute value (i.e. a C<GAUGE>) or a rate (i.e. a C<DERIVE>) is taken from the
7067 I<Type's> definition.
7069 =item B<Instance> I<TypeInstance>
7071 If set, I<TypeInstance> is used to populate the type instance field of the
7072 created value lists. Otherwise, no type instance is used.
7074 =item B<ValueFrom> I<Index>
7076 Configure to read the value from the field with the zero-based index I<Index>.
7077 If the value is parsed as signed integer, unsigned integer or double depends on
7078 the B<Type> setting, see above.
7080 =back
7082 =item E<lt>B<File> I<Path>E<gt>
7084 Each B<File> block represents one CSV file to read. There must be at least one
7085 I<File> block but there can be multiple if you have multiple CSV files.
7087 =over 4
7089 =item B<Instance> I<PluginInstance>
7091 Sets the I<plugin instance> used when dispatching the values.
7093 =item B<Collect> I<Metric>
7095 Specifies which I<Metric> to collect. This option must be specified at least
7096 once, and you can use this option multiple times to specify more than one
7097 metric to be extracted from this statistic file.
7099 =item B<Interval> I<Seconds>
7101 Configures the interval in which to read values from this instance / file.
7102 Defaults to the plugin's default interval.
7104 =item B<TimeFrom> I<Index>
7106 Rather than using the local time when dispatching a value, read the timestamp
7107 from the field with the zero-based index I<Index>. The value is interpreted as
7108 seconds since epoch. The value is parsed as a double and may be factional.
7110 =back
7112 =back
7114 =head2 Plugin C<teamspeak2>
7116 The C<teamspeak2 plugin> connects to the query port of a teamspeak2 server and
7117 polls interesting global and virtual server data. The plugin can query only one
7118 physical server but unlimited virtual servers. You can use the following
7119 options to configure it:
7121 =over 4
7123 =item B<Host> I<hostname/ip>
7125 The hostname or ip which identifies the physical server.
7126 Default: 127.0.0.1
7128 =item B<Port> I<port>
7130 The query port of the physical server. This needs to be a string.
7131 Default: "51234"
7133 =item B<Server> I<port>
7135 This option has to be added once for every virtual server the plugin should
7136 query. If you want to query the virtual server on port 8767 this is what the
7137 option would look like:
7139 Server "8767"
7141 This option, although numeric, needs to be a string, i.E<nbsp>e. you B<must>
7142 use quotes around it! If no such statement is given only global information
7143 will be collected.
7145 =back
7147 =head2 Plugin C<ted>
7149 The I<TED> plugin connects to a device of "The Energy Detective", a device to
7150 measure power consumption. These devices are usually connected to a serial
7151 (RS232) or USB port. The plugin opens a configured device and tries to read the
7152 current energy readings. For more information on TED, visit
7153 L<http://www.theenergydetective.com/>.
7155 Available configuration options:
7157 =over 4
7159 =item B<Device> I<Path>
7161 Path to the device on which TED is connected. collectd will need read and write
7162 permissions on that file.
7164 Default: B</dev/ttyUSB0>
7166 =item B<Retries> I<Num>
7168 Apparently reading from TED is not that reliable. You can therefore configure a
7169 number of retries here. You only configure the I<retries> here, to if you
7170 specify zero, one reading will be performed (but no retries if that fails); if
7171 you specify three, a maximum of four readings are performed. Negative values
7172 are illegal.
7174 Default: B<0>
7176 =back
7178 =head2 Plugin C<tcpconns>
7180 The C<tcpconns plugin> counts the number of currently established TCP
7181 connections based on the local port and/or the remote port. Since there may be
7182 a lot of connections the default if to count all connections with a local port,
7183 for which a listening socket is opened. You can use the following options to
7184 fine-tune the ports you are interested in:
7186 =over 4
7188 =item B<ListeningPorts> I<true>|I<false>
7190 If this option is set to I<true>, statistics for all local ports for which a
7191 listening socket exists are collected. The default depends on B<LocalPort> and
7192 B<RemotePort> (see below): If no port at all is specifically selected, the
7193 default is to collect listening ports. If specific ports (no matter if local or
7194 remote ports) are selected, this option defaults to I<false>, i.E<nbsp>e. only
7195 the selected ports will be collected unless this option is set to I<true>
7196 specifically.
7198 =item B<LocalPort> I<Port>
7200 Count the connections to a specific local port. This can be used to see how
7201 many connections are handled by a specific daemon, e.E<nbsp>g. the mailserver.
7202 You have to specify the port in numeric form, so for the mailserver example
7203 you'd need to set B<25>.
7205 =item B<RemotePort> I<Port>
7207 Count the connections to a specific remote port. This is useful to see how
7208 much a remote service is used. This is most useful if you want to know how many
7209 connections a local service has opened to remote services, e.E<nbsp>g. how many
7210 connections a mail server or news server has to other mail or news servers, or
7211 how many connections a web proxy holds to web servers. You have to give the
7212 port in numeric form.
7214 =item B<AllPortsSummary> I<true>|I<false>
7216 If this option is set to I<true> a summary of statistics from all connections
7217 are collected. This option defaults to I<false>.
7219 =back
7221 =head2 Plugin C<thermal>
7223 =over 4
7225 =item B<ForceUseProcfs> I<true>|I<false>
7227 By default, the I<Thermal plugin> tries to read the statistics from the Linux
7228 C<sysfs> interface. If that is not available, the plugin falls back to the
7229 C<procfs> interface. By setting this option to I<true>, you can force the
7230 plugin to use the latter. This option defaults to I<false>.
7232 =item B<Device> I<Device>
7234 Selects the name of the thermal device that you want to collect or ignore,
7235 depending on the value of the B<IgnoreSelected> option. This option may be
7236 used multiple times to specify a list of devices.
7238 =item B<IgnoreSelected> I<true>|I<false>
7240 Invert the selection: If set to true, all devices B<except> the ones that
7241 match the device names specified by the B<Device> option are collected. By
7242 default only selected devices are collected if a selection is made. If no
7243 selection is configured at all, B<all> devices are selected.
7245 =back
7247 =head2 Plugin C<threshold>
7249 The I<Threshold plugin> checks values collected or received by I<collectd>
7250 against a configurable I<threshold> and issues I<notifications> if values are
7251 out of bounds.
7253 Documentation for this plugin is available in the L<collectd-threshold(5)>
7254 manual page.
7256 =head2 Plugin C<tokyotyrant>
7258 The I<TokyoTyrant plugin> connects to a TokyoTyrant server and collects a
7259 couple metrics: number of records, and database size on disk.
7261 =over 4
7263 =item B<Host> I<Hostname/IP>
7265 The hostname or ip which identifies the server.
7266 Default: B<127.0.0.1>
7268 =item B<Port> I<Service/Port>
7270 The query port of the server. This needs to be a string, even if the port is
7271 given in its numeric form.
7272 Default: B<1978>
7274 =back
7276 =head2 Plugin C<turbostat>
7278 The I<Turbostat plugin> reads CPU frequency and C-state residency on modern
7279 Intel processors by using the new Model Specific Registers.
7281 =over 4
7283 =item B<CoreCstates> I<Bitmask(Integer)>
7285 Bitmask of the list of core C states supported by the processor.
7286 This option should only be used if the automated detection fails.
7287 Default value extracted from the cpu model and family.
7289 Currently supported C-states (by this plugin): 3, 6, 7
7291 Example: (1<<3)+(1<<6)+(1<<7) = 392 for all states
7293 =item B<PackageCstates> I<Bitmask(Integer)>
7295 Bitmask of the list of pacages C states supported by the processor.
7296 This option should only be used if the automated detection fails.
7297 Default value extracted from the cpu model and family.
7299 Currently supported C-states (by this plugin): 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
7301 Example: (1<<2)+(1<<3)+(1<<6)+(1<<7) = 396 for states 2, 3, 6 and 7
7303 =item B<SystemManagementInterrupt> I<true>|I<false>
7305 Boolean enabling the collection of the I/O System-Management Interrupt
7306 counter'. This option should only be used if the automated detection
7307 fails or if you want to disable this feature.
7309 =item B<DigitalTemperatureSensor> I<true>|I<false>
7311 Boolean enabling the collection of the temperature of each core.
7312 This option should only be used if the automated detectionfails or
7313 if you want to disable this feature.
7315 =item B<DigitalTemperatureSensor> I<true>|I<false>
7317 Boolean enabling the collection of the temperature of each package.
7318 This option should only be used if the automated detectionfails or
7319 if you want to disable this feature.
7321 =item B<TCCActivationTemp> I<Temperature>
7323 Thermal Control Circuit Activation Temperature of the installed
7324 CPU. This temperature is used when collecting the temperature of
7325 cores or packages. This option should only be used if the automated
7326 detection fails. Default value extracted from B<MSR_IA32_TEMPERATURE_TARGET>
7328 =item B<RunningAveragePowerLimit> I<Bitmask(Integer)>
7330 Bitmask of the list of elements to be thermally monitored. This option
7331 should only be used if the automated detection fails or if you want to
7332 disable some collections. The different bits of this bitmask accepted
7333 by this plugin are:
7335 =over 4
7337 =item 0 ('1'): Package
7339 =item 1 ('2'): DRAM
7341 =item 2 ('4'): Cores
7343 =item 3 ('8'): Embedded graphic device
7345 =back
7347 =back
7349 =head2 Plugin C<unixsock>
7351 =over 4
7353 =item B<SocketFile> I<Path>
7355 Sets the socket-file which is to be created.
7357 =item B<SocketGroup> I<Group>
7359 If running as root change the group of the UNIX-socket after it has been
7360 created. Defaults to B<collectd>.
7362 =item B<SocketPerms> I<Permissions>
7364 Change the file permissions of the UNIX-socket after it has been created. The
7365 permissions must be given as a numeric, octal value as you would pass to
7366 L<chmod(1)>. Defaults to B<0770>.
7368 =item B<DeleteSocket> B<false>|B<true>
7370 If set to B<true>, delete the socket file before calling L<bind(2)>, if a file
7371 with the given name already exists. If I<collectd> crashes a socket file may be
7372 left over, preventing the daemon from opening a new socket when restarted.
7373 Since this is potentially dangerous, this defaults to B<false>.
7375 =back
7377 =head2 Plugin C<uuid>
7379 This plugin, if loaded, causes the Hostname to be taken from the machine's
7380 UUID. The UUID is a universally unique designation for the machine, usually
7381 taken from the machine's BIOS. This is most useful if the machine is running in
7382 a virtual environment such as Xen, in which case the UUID is preserved across
7383 shutdowns and migration.
7385 The following methods are used to find the machine's UUID, in order:
7387 =over 4
7389 =item *
7391 Check I</etc/uuid> (or I<UUIDFile>).
7393 =item *
7395 Check for UUID from HAL (L<http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/hal>) if
7396 present.
7398 =item *
7400 Check for UUID from C<dmidecode> / SMBIOS.
7402 =item *
7404 Check for UUID from Xen hypervisor.
7406 =back
7408 If no UUID can be found then the hostname is not modified.
7410 =over 4
7412 =item B<UUIDFile> I<Path>
7414 Take the UUID from the given file (default I</etc/uuid>).
7416 =back
7418 =head2 Plugin C<varnish>
7420 The I<varnish plugin> collects information about Varnish, an HTTP accelerator.
7421 It collects a subset of the values displayed by L<varnishstat(1)>, and
7422 organizes them in categories which can be enabled or disabled. Currently only
7423 metrics shown in L<varnishstat(1)>'s I<MAIN> section are collected. The exact
7424 meaning of each metric can be found in L<varnish-counters(7)>.
7426 Synopsis:
7428 <Plugin "varnish">
7429 <Instance "example">
7430 CollectBackend true
7431 CollectBan false
7432 CollectCache true
7433 CollectConnections true
7434 CollectDirectorDNS false
7435 CollectESI false
7436 CollectFetch false
7437 CollectHCB false
7438 CollectObjects false
7439 CollectPurge false
7440 CollectSession false
7441 CollectSHM true
7442 CollectSMA false
7443 CollectSMS false
7444 CollectSM false
7445 CollectStruct false
7446 CollectTotals false
7447 CollectUptime false
7448 CollectVCL false
7449 CollectVSM false
7450 CollectWorkers false
7451 </Instance>
7452 </Plugin>
7454 The configuration consists of one or more E<lt>B<Instance>E<nbsp>I<Name>E<gt>
7455 blocks. I<Name> is the parameter passed to "varnishd -n". If left empty, it
7456 will collectd statistics from the default "varnishd" instance (this should work
7457 fine in most cases).
7459 Inside each E<lt>B<Instance>E<gt> blocks, the following options are recognized:
7461 =over 4
7463 =item B<CollectBackend> B<true>|B<false>
7465 Back-end connection statistics, such as successful, reused,
7466 and closed connections. True by default.
7468 =item B<CollectBan> B<true>|B<false>
7470 Statistics about ban operations, such as number of bans added, retired, and
7471 number of objects tested against ban operations. Only available with Varnish
7472 3.x and above. False by default.
7474 =item B<CollectCache> B<true>|B<false>
7476 Cache hits and misses. True by default.
7478 =item B<CollectConnections> B<true>|B<false>
7480 Number of client connections received, accepted and dropped. True by default.
7482 =item B<CollectDirectorDNS> B<true>|B<false>
7484 DNS director lookup cache statistics. Only available with Varnish 3.x. False by
7485 default.
7487 =item B<CollectESI> B<true>|B<false>
7489 Edge Side Includes (ESI) parse statistics. False by default.
7491 =item B<CollectFetch> B<true>|B<false>
7493 Statistics about fetches (HTTP requests sent to the backend). False by default.
7495 =item B<CollectHCB> B<true>|B<false>
7497 Inserts and look-ups in the crit bit tree based hash. Look-ups are
7498 divided into locked and unlocked look-ups. False by default.
7500 =item B<CollectObjects> B<true>|B<false>
7502 Statistics on cached objects: number of objects expired, nuked (prematurely
7503 expired), saved, moved, etc. False by default.
7505 =item B<CollectPurge> B<true>|B<false>
7507 Statistics about purge operations, such as number of purges added, retired, and
7508 number of objects tested against purge operations. Only available with Varnish
7509 2.x. False by default.
7511 =item B<CollectSession> B<true>|B<false>
7513 Client session statistics. Number of past and current sessions, session herd and
7514 linger counters, etc. False by default. Note that if using Varnish 4.x, some
7515 metrics found in the Connections and Threads sections with previous versions of
7516 Varnish have been moved here.
7518 =item B<CollectSHM> B<true>|B<false>
7520 Statistics about the shared memory log, a memory region to store
7521 log messages which is flushed to disk when full. True by default.
7523 =item B<CollectSMA> B<true>|B<false>
7525 malloc or umem (umem_alloc(3MALLOC) based) storage statistics. The umem storage
7526 component is Solaris specific. Only available with Varnish 2.x. False by
7527 default.
7529 =item B<CollectSMS> B<true>|B<false>
7531 synth (synthetic content) storage statistics. This storage
7532 component is used internally only. False by default.
7534 =item B<CollectSM> B<true>|B<false>
7536 file (memory mapped file) storage statistics. Only available with Varnish 2.x.
7537 False by default.
7539 =item B<CollectStruct> B<true>|B<false>
7541 Current varnish internal state statistics. Number of current sessions, objects
7542 in cache store, open connections to backends (with Varnish 2.x), etc. False by
7543 default.
7545 =item B<CollectTotals> B<true>|B<false>
7547 Collects overview counters, such as the number of sessions created,
7548 the number of requests and bytes transferred. False by default.
7550 =item B<CollectUptime> B<true>|B<false>
7552 Varnish uptime. Only available with Varnish 3.x and above. False by default.
7554 =item B<CollectVCL> B<true>|B<false>
7556 Number of total (available + discarded) VCL (config files). False by default.
7558 =item B<CollectVSM> B<true>|B<false>
7560 Collect statistics about Varnish's shared memory usage (used by the logging and
7561 statistics subsystems). Only available with Varnish 4.x. False by default.
7563 =item B<CollectWorkers> B<true>|B<false>
7565 Collect statistics about worker threads. False by default.
7567 =back
7569 =head2 Plugin C<virt>
7571 This plugin allows CPU, disk and network load to be collected for virtualized
7572 guests on the machine. This means that these metrics can be collected for guest
7573 systems without installing any software on them - I<collectd> only runs on the
7574 host system. The statistics are collected through libvirt
7575 (L<http://libvirt.org/>).
7577 Only I<Connection> is required.
7579 =over 4
7581 =item B<Connection> I<uri>
7583 Connect to the hypervisor given by I<uri>. For example if using Xen use:
7585 Connection "xen:///"
7587 Details which URIs allowed are given at L<http://libvirt.org/uri.html>.
7589 =item B<RefreshInterval> I<seconds>
7591 Refresh the list of domains and devices every I<seconds>. The default is 60
7592 seconds. Setting this to be the same or smaller than the I<Interval> will cause
7593 the list of domains and devices to be refreshed on every iteration.
7595 Refreshing the devices in particular is quite a costly operation, so if your
7596 virtualization setup is static you might consider increasing this. If this
7597 option is set to 0, refreshing is disabled completely.
7599 =item B<Domain> I<name>
7601 =item B<BlockDevice> I<name:dev>
7603 =item B<InterfaceDevice> I<name:dev>
7605 =item B<IgnoreSelected> B<true>|B<false>
7607 Select which domains and devices are collected.
7609 If I<IgnoreSelected> is not given or B<false> then only the listed domains and
7610 disk/network devices are collected.
7612 If I<IgnoreSelected> is B<true> then the test is reversed and the listed
7613 domains and disk/network devices are ignored, while the rest are collected.
7615 The domain name and device names may use a regular expression, if the name is
7616 surrounded by I</.../> and collectd was compiled with support for regexps.
7618 The default is to collect statistics for all domains and all their devices.
7620 Example:
7622 BlockDevice "/:hdb/"
7623 IgnoreSelected "true"
7625 Ignore all I<hdb> devices on any domain, but other block devices (eg. I<hda>)
7626 will be collected.
7628 =item B<HostnameFormat> B<name|uuid|hostname|...>
7630 When the virt plugin logs data, it sets the hostname of the collected data
7631 according to this setting. The default is to use the guest name as provided by
7632 the hypervisor, which is equal to setting B<name>.
7634 B<uuid> means use the guest's UUID. This is useful if you want to track the
7635 same guest across migrations.
7637 B<hostname> means to use the global B<Hostname> setting, which is probably not
7638 useful on its own because all guests will appear to have the same name.
7640 You can also specify combinations of these fields. For example B<name uuid>
7641 means to concatenate the guest name and UUID (with a literal colon character
7642 between, thus I<"foo:1234-1234-1234-1234">).
7644 At the moment of writing (collectd-5.5), hostname string is limited to 62
7645 characters. In case when combination of fields exceeds 62 characters,
7646 hostname will be truncated without a warning.
7648 =item B<InterfaceFormat> B<name>|B<address>
7650 When the virt plugin logs interface data, it sets the name of the collected
7651 data according to this setting. The default is to use the path as provided by
7652 the hypervisor (the "dev" property of the target node), which is equal to
7653 setting B<name>.
7655 B<address> means use the interface's mac address. This is useful since the
7656 interface path might change between reboots of a guest or across migrations.
7658 =item B<PluginInstanceFormat> B<name|uuid|none>
7660 When the virt plugin logs data, it sets the plugin_instance of the collected
7661 data according to this setting. The default is to not set the plugin_instance.
7663 B<name> means use the guest's name as provided by the hypervisor.
7664 B<uuid> means use the guest's UUID.
7666 You can also specify combinations of the B<name> and B<uuid> fields.
7667 For example B<name uuid> means to concatenate the guest name and UUID
7668 (with a literal colon character between, thus I<"foo:1234-1234-1234-1234">).
7670 =back
7672 =head2 Plugin C<vmem>
7674 The C<vmem> plugin collects information about the usage of virtual memory.
7675 Since the statistics provided by the Linux kernel are very detailed, they are
7676 collected very detailed. However, to get all the details, you have to switch
7677 them on manually. Most people just want an overview over, such as the number of
7678 pages read from swap space.
7680 =over 4
7682 =item B<Verbose> B<true>|B<false>
7684 Enables verbose collection of information. This will start collecting page
7685 "actions", e.E<nbsp>g. page allocations, (de)activations, steals and so on.
7686 Part of these statistics are collected on a "per zone" basis.
7688 =back
7690 =head2 Plugin C<vserver>
7692 This plugin doesn't have any options. B<VServer> support is only available for
7693 Linux. It cannot yet be found in a vanilla kernel, though. To make use of this
7694 plugin you need a kernel that has B<VServer> support built in, i.E<nbsp>e. you
7695 need to apply the patches and compile your own kernel, which will then provide
7696 the F</proc/virtual> filesystem that is required by this plugin.
7698 The B<VServer> homepage can be found at L<http://linux-vserver.org/>.
7700 B<Note>: The traffic collected by this plugin accounts for the amount of
7701 traffic passing a socket which might be a lot less than the actual on-wire
7702 traffic (e.E<nbsp>g. due to headers and retransmission). If you want to
7703 collect on-wire traffic you could, for example, use the logging facilities of
7704 iptables to feed data for the guest IPs into the iptables plugin.
7706 =head2 Plugin C<write_graphite>
7708 The C<write_graphite> plugin writes data to I<Graphite>, an open-source metrics
7709 storage and graphing project. The plugin connects to I<Carbon>, the data layer
7710 of I<Graphite>, via I<TCP> or I<UDP> and sends data via the "line based"
7711 protocol (per default using portE<nbsp>2003). The data will be sent in blocks
7712 of at most 1428 bytes to minimize the number of network packets.
7714 Synopsis:
7716 <Plugin write_graphite>
7717 <Node "example">
7718 Host "localhost"
7719 Port "2003"
7720 Protocol "tcp"
7721 LogSendErrors true
7722 Prefix "collectd"
7723 </Node>
7724 </Plugin>
7726 The configuration consists of one or more E<lt>B<Node>E<nbsp>I<Name>E<gt>
7727 blocks. Inside the B<Node> blocks, the following options are recognized:
7729 =over 4
7731 =item B<Host> I<Address>
7733 Hostname or address to connect to. Defaults to C<localhost>.
7735 =item B<Port> I<Service>
7737 Service name or port number to connect to. Defaults to C<2003>.
7739 =item B<Protocol> I<String>
7741 Protocol to use when connecting to I<Graphite>. Defaults to C<tcp>.
7743 =item B<ReconnectInterval> I<Seconds>
7745 When set to non-zero, forces the connection to the Graphite backend to be
7746 closed and re-opend periodically. This behavior is desirable in environments
7747 where the connection to the Graphite backend is done through load balancers,
7748 for example. When set to zero, the default, the connetion is kept open for as
7749 long as possible.
7751 =item B<LogSendErrors> B<false>|B<true>
7753 If set to B<true> (the default), logs errors when sending data to I<Graphite>.
7754 If set to B<false>, it will not log the errors. This is especially useful when
7755 using Protocol UDP since many times we want to use the "fire-and-forget"
7756 approach and logging errors fills syslog with unneeded messages.
7758 =item B<Prefix> I<String>
7760 When set, I<String> is added in front of the host name. Dots and whitespace are
7761 I<not> escaped in this string (see B<EscapeCharacter> below).
7763 =item B<Postfix> I<String>
7765 When set, I<String> is appended to the host name. Dots and whitespace are
7766 I<not> escaped in this string (see B<EscapeCharacter> below).
7768 =item B<EscapeCharacter> I<Char>
7770 I<Carbon> uses the dot (C<.>) as escape character and doesn't allow whitespace
7771 in the identifier. The B<EscapeCharacter> option determines which character
7772 dots, whitespace and control characters are replaced with. Defaults to
7773 underscore (C<_>).
7775 =item B<StoreRates> B<false>|B<true>
7777 If set to B<true> (the default), convert counter values to rates. If set to
7778 B<false> counter values are stored as is, i.E<nbsp>e. as an increasing integer
7779 number.
7781 =item B<SeparateInstances> B<false>|B<true>
7783 If set to B<true>, the plugin instance and type instance will be in their own
7784 path component, for example C<host.cpu.0.cpu.idle>. If set to B<false> (the
7785 default), the plugin and plugin instance (and likewise the type and type
7786 instance) are put into one component, for example C<host.cpu-0.cpu-idle>.
7788 =item B<AlwaysAppendDS> B<false>|B<true>
7790 If set to B<true>, append the name of the I<Data Source> (DS) to the "metric"
7791 identifier. If set to B<false> (the default), this is only done when there is
7792 more than one DS.
7794 =back
7796 =head2 Plugin C<write_tsdb>
7798 The C<write_tsdb> plugin writes data to I<OpenTSDB>, a scalable open-source
7799 time series database. The plugin connects to a I<TSD>, a masterless, no shared
7800 state daemon that ingests metrics and stores them in HBase. The plugin uses
7801 I<TCP> over the "line based" protocol with a default port 4242. The data will
7802 be sent in blocks of at most 1428 bytes to minimize the number of network
7803 packets.
7805 Synopsis:
7807 <Plugin write_tsdb>
7808 <Node "example">
7809 Host "tsd-1.my.domain"
7810 Port "4242"
7811 HostTags "status=production"
7812 </Node>
7813 </Plugin>
7815 The configuration consists of one or more E<lt>B<Node>E<nbsp>I<Name>E<gt>
7816 blocks. Inside the B<Node> blocks, the following options are recognized:
7818 =over 4
7820 =item B<Host> I<Address>
7822 Hostname or address to connect to. Defaults to C<localhost>.
7824 =item B<Port> I<Service>
7826 Service name or port number to connect to. Defaults to C<4242>.
7829 =item B<HostTags> I<String>
7831 When set, I<HostTags> is added to the end of the metric. It is intended to be
7832 used for name=value pairs that the TSD will tag the metric with. Dots and
7833 whitespace are I<not> escaped in this string.
7835 =item B<StoreRates> B<false>|B<true>
7837 If set to B<true>, convert counter values to rates. If set to B<false>
7838 (the default) counter values are stored as is, as an increasing
7839 integer number.
7841 =item B<AlwaysAppendDS> B<false>|B<true>
7843 If set the B<true>, append the name of the I<Data Source> (DS) to the "metric"
7844 identifier. If set to B<false> (the default), this is only done when there is
7845 more than one DS.
7847 =back
7849 =head2 Plugin C<write_mongodb>
7851 The I<write_mongodb plugin> will send values to I<MongoDB>, a schema-less
7852 NoSQL database.
7854 B<Synopsis:>
7856 <Plugin "write_mongodb">
7857 <Node "default">
7858 Host "localhost"
7859 Port "27017"
7860 Timeout 1000
7861 StoreRates true
7862 </Node>
7863 </Plugin>
7865 The plugin can send values to multiple instances of I<MongoDB> by specifying
7866 one B<Node> block for each instance. Within the B<Node> blocks, the following
7867 options are available:
7869 =over 4
7871 =item B<Host> I<Address>
7873 Hostname or address to connect to. Defaults to C<localhost>.
7875 =item B<Port> I<Service>
7877 Service name or port number to connect to. Defaults to C<27017>.
7879 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
7881 Set the timeout for each operation on I<MongoDB> to I<Timeout> milliseconds.
7882 Setting this option to zero means no timeout, which is the default.
7884 =item B<StoreRates> B<false>|B<true>
7886 If set to B<true> (the default), convert counter values to rates. If set to
7887 B<false> counter values are stored as is, i.e. as an increasing integer
7888 number.
7890 =item B<Database> I<Database>
7892 =item B<User> I<User>
7894 =item B<Password> I<Password>
7896 Sets the information used when authenticating to a I<MongoDB> database. The
7897 fields are optional (in which case no authentication is attempted), but if you
7898 want to use authentication all three fields must be set.
7900 =back
7902 =head2 Plugin C<write_http>
7904 This output plugin submits values to an HTTP server using POST requests and
7905 encoding metrics with JSON or using the C<PUTVAL> command described in
7906 L<collectd-unixsock(5)>.
7908 Synopsis:
7910 <Plugin "write_http">
7911 <Node "example">
7912 URL "http://example.com/post-collectd"
7913 User "collectd"
7914 Password "weCh3ik0"
7915 Format JSON
7916 </Node>
7917 </Plugin>
7919 The plugin can send values to multiple HTTP servers by specifying one
7920 E<lt>B<Node>E<nbsp>I<Name>E<gt> block for each server. Within each B<Node>
7921 block, the following options are available:
7923 =over 4
7925 =item B<URL> I<URL>
7927 URL to which the values are submitted to. Mandatory.
7929 =item B<User> I<Username>
7931 Optional user name needed for authentication.
7933 =item B<Password> I<Password>
7935 Optional password needed for authentication.
7937 =item B<VerifyPeer> B<true>|B<false>
7939 Enable or disable peer SSL certificate verification. See
7940 L<http://curl.haxx.se/docs/sslcerts.html> for details. Enabled by default.
7942 =item B<VerifyHost> B<true|false>
7944 Enable or disable peer host name verification. If enabled, the plugin checks if
7945 the C<Common Name> or a C<Subject Alternate Name> field of the SSL certificate
7946 matches the host name provided by the B<URL> option. If this identity check
7947 fails, the connection is aborted. Obviously, only works when connecting to a
7948 SSL enabled server. Enabled by default.
7950 =item B<CACert> I<File>
7952 File that holds one or more SSL certificates. If you want to use HTTPS you will
7953 possibly need this option. What CA certificates come bundled with C<libcurl>
7954 and are checked by default depends on the distribution you use.
7956 =item B<CAPath> I<Directory>
7958 Directory holding one or more CA certificate files. You can use this if for
7959 some reason all the needed CA certificates aren't in the same file and can't be
7960 pointed to using the B<CACert> option. Requires C<libcurl> to be built against
7961 OpenSSL.
7963 =item B<ClientKey> I<File>
7965 File that holds the private key in PEM format to be used for certificate-based
7966 authentication.
7968 =item B<ClientCert> I<File>
7970 File that holds the SSL certificate to be used for certificate-based
7971 authentication.
7973 =item B<ClientKeyPass> I<Password>
7975 Password required to load the private key in B<ClientKey>.
7977 =item B<Header> I<Header>
7979 A HTTP header to add to the request. Multiple headers are added if this option is specified more than once. Example:
7981 Header "X-Custom-Header: custom_value"
7983 =item B<SSLVersion> B<SSLv2>|B<SSLv3>|B<TLSv1>|B<TLSv1_0>|B<TLSv1_1>|B<TLSv1_2>
7985 Define which SSL protocol version must be used. By default C<libcurl> will
7986 attempt to figure out the remote SSL protocol version. See
7987 L<curl_easy_setopt(3)> for more details.
7989 =item B<Format> B<Command>|B<JSON>|B<KAIROSDB>
7991 Format of the output to generate. If set to B<Command>, will create output that
7992 is understood by the I<Exec> and I<UnixSock> plugins. When set to B<JSON>, will
7993 create output in the I<JavaScript Object Notation> (JSON). When set to KAIROSDB
7994 , will create output in the KairosDB format.
7996 Defaults to B<Command>.
7998 =item B<Metrics> B<true>|B<false>
8000 Controls whether I<metrics> are POSTed to this location. Defaults to B<true>.
8002 =item B<Notifications> B<false>|B<true>
8004 Controls whether I<notifications> are POSTed to this location. Defaults to B<false>.
8006 =item B<StoreRates> B<true|false>
8008 If set to B<true>, convert counter values to rates. If set to B<false> (the
8009 default) counter values are stored as is, i.e. as an increasing integer number.
8011 =item B<BufferSize> I<Bytes>
8013 Sets the send buffer size to I<Bytes>. By increasing this buffer, less HTTP
8014 requests will be generated, but more metrics will be batched / metrics are
8015 cached for longer before being sent, introducing additional delay until they
8016 are available on the server side. I<Bytes> must be at least 1024 and cannot
8017 exceed the size of an C<int>, i.e. 2E<nbsp>GByte.
8018 Defaults to C<4096>.
8020 =item B<LowSpeedLimit> I<Bytes per Second>
8022 Sets the minimal transfer rate in I<Bytes per Second> below which the
8023 connection with the HTTP server will be considered too slow and aborted. All
8024 the data submitted over this connection will probably be lost. Defaults to 0,
8025 which means no minimum transfer rate is enforced.
8027 =item B<Timeout> I<Timeout>
8029 Sets the maximum time in milliseconds given for HTTP POST operations to
8030 complete. When this limit is reached, the POST operation will be aborted, and
8031 all the data in the current send buffer will probably be lost. Defaults to 0,
8032 which means the connection never times out.
8034 =item B<LogHttpError> B<false>|B<true>
8036 Enables printing of HTTP error code to log. Turned off by default.
8038 The C<write_http> plugin regularly submits the collected values to the HTTP
8039 server. How frequently this happens depends on how much data you are collecting
8040 and the size of B<BufferSize>. The optimal value to set B<Timeout> to is
8041 slightly below this interval, which you can estimate by monitoring the network
8042 traffic between collectd and the HTTP server.
8044 =back
8046 =head2 Plugin C<write_kafka>
8048 The I<write_kafka plugin> will send values to a I<Kafka> topic, a distributed
8049 queue.
8050 Synopsis:
8052 <Plugin "write_kafka">
8053 Property "metadata.broker.list" "broker1:9092,broker2:9092"
8054 <Topic "collectd">
8055 Format JSON
8056 </Topic>
8057 </Plugin>
8059 The following options are understood by the I<write_kafka plugin>:
8061 =over 4
8063 =item E<lt>B<Topic> I<Name>E<gt>
8065 The plugin's configuration consists of one or more B<Topic> blocks. Each block
8066 is given a unique I<Name> and specifies one kafka producer.
8067 Inside the B<Topic> block, the following per-topic options are
8068 understood:
8070 =over 4
8072 =item B<Property> I<String> I<String>
8074 Configure the named property for the current topic. Properties are
8075 forwarded to the kafka producer library B<librdkafka>.
8077 =item B<Key> I<String>
8079 Use the specified string as a partitioning key for the topic. Kafka breaks
8080 topic into partitions and guarantees that for a given topology, the same
8081 consumer will be used for a specific key. The special (case insensitive)
8082 string B<Random> can be used to specify that an arbitrary partition should
8083 be used.
8085 =item B<Format> B<Command>|B<JSON>|B<Graphite>
8087 Selects the format in which messages are sent to the broker. If set to
8088 B<Command> (the default), values are sent as C<PUTVAL> commands which are
8089 identical to the syntax used by the I<Exec> and I<UnixSock plugins>.
8091 If set to B<JSON>, the values are encoded in the I<JavaScript Object Notation>,
8092 an easy and straight forward exchange format.
8094 If set to B<Graphite>, values are encoded in the I<Graphite> format, which is
8095 C<E<lt>metricE<gt> E<lt>valueE<gt> E<lt>timestampE<gt>\n>.
8097 =item B<StoreRates> B<true>|B<false>
8099 Determines whether or not C<COUNTER>, C<DERIVE> and C<ABSOLUTE> data sources
8100 are converted to a I<rate> (i.e. a C<GAUGE> value). If set to B<false> (the
8101 default), no conversion is performed. Otherwise the conversion is performed
8102 using the internal value cache.
8104 Please note that currently this option is only used if the B<Format> option has
8105 been set to B<JSON>.
8107 =item B<GraphitePrefix> (B<Format>=I<Graphite> only)
8109 A prefix can be added in the metric name when outputting in the I<Graphite>
8110 format. It's added before the I<Host> name.
8111 Metric name will be
8112 C<E<lt>prefixE<gt>E<lt>hostE<gt>E<lt>postfixE<gt>E<lt>pluginE<gt>E<lt>typeE<gt>E<lt>nameE<gt>>
8114 =item B<GraphitePostfix> (B<Format>=I<Graphite> only)
8116 A postfix can be added in the metric name when outputting in the I<Graphite>
8117 format. It's added after the I<Host> name.
8118 Metric name will be
8119 C<E<lt>prefixE<gt>E<lt>hostE<gt>E<lt>postfixE<gt>E<lt>pluginE<gt>E<lt>typeE<gt>E<lt>nameE<gt>>
8121 =item B<GraphiteEscapeChar> (B<Format>=I<Graphite> only)
8123 Specify a character to replace dots (.) in the host part of the metric name.
8124 In I<Graphite> metric name, dots are used as separators between different
8125 metric parts (host, plugin, type).
8126 Default is C<_> (I<Underscore>).
8128 =item B<GraphiteSeparateInstances> B<false>|B<true>
8130 If set to B<true>, the plugin instance and type instance will be in their own
8131 path component, for example C<host.cpu.0.cpu.idle>. If set to B<false> (the
8132 default), the plugin and plugin instance (and likewise the type and type
8133 instance) are put into one component, for example C<host.cpu-0.cpu-idle>.
8135 =item B<StoreRates> B<true>|B<false>
8137 If set to B<true> (the default), convert counter values to rates. If set to
8138 B<false> counter values are stored as is, i.e. as an increasing integer number.
8140 This will be reflected in the C<ds_type> tag: If B<StoreRates> is enabled,
8141 converted values will have "rate" appended to the data source type, e.g.
8142 C<ds_type:derive:rate>.
8144 =back
8146 =item B<Property> I<String> I<String>
8148 Configure the kafka producer through properties, you almost always will
8149 want to set B<metadata.broker.list> to your Kafka broker list.
8151 =back
8153 =head2 Plugin C<write_redis>
8155 The I<write_redis plugin> submits values to I<Redis>, a data structure server.
8157 Synopsis:
8159 <Plugin "write_redis">
8160 <Node "example">
8161 Host "localhost"
8162 Port "6379"
8163 Timeout 1000
8164 Prefix "collectd/"
8165 Database 1
8166 MaxSetSize -1
8167 StoreRates true
8168 </Node>
8169 </Plugin>
8171 Values are submitted to I<Sorted Sets>, using the metric name as the key, and
8172 the timestamp as the score. Retrieving a date range can then be done using the
8173 C<ZRANGEBYSCORE> I<Redis> command. Additionally, all the identifiers of these
8174 I<Sorted Sets> are kept in a I<Set> called C<collectd/values> (or
8175 C<${prefix}/values> if the B<Prefix> option was specified) and can be retrieved
8176 using the C<SMEMBERS> I<Redis> command. You can specify the database to use
8177 with the B<Database> parameter (default is C<0>). See
8178 L<http://redis.io/commands#sorted_set> and L<http://redis.io/commands#set> for
8179 details.
8181 The information shown in the synopsis above is the I<default configuration>
8182 which is used by the plugin if no configuration is present.
8184 The plugin can send values to multiple instances of I<Redis> by specifying
8185 one B<Node> block for each instance. Within the B<Node> blocks, the following
8186 options are available:
8188 =over 4
8190 =item B<Node> I<Nodename>
8192 The B<Node> block identifies a new I<Redis> node, that is a new I<Redis>
8193 instance running on a specified host and port. The node name is a
8194 canonical identifier which is used as I<plugin instance>. It is limited to
8195 51E<nbsp>characters in length.
8197 =item B<Host> I<Hostname>
8199 The B<Host> option is the hostname or IP-address where the I<Redis> instance is
8200 running on.
8202 =item B<Port> I<Port>
8204 The B<Port> option is the TCP port on which the Redis instance accepts
8205 connections. Either a service name of a port number may be given. Please note
8206 that numerical port numbers must be given as a string, too.
8208 =item B<Timeout> I<Milliseconds>
8210 The B<Timeout> option sets the socket connection timeout, in milliseconds.
8212 =item B<Prefix> I<Prefix>
8214 Prefix used when constructing the name of the I<Sorted Sets> and the I<Set>
8215 containing all metrics. Defaults to C<collectd/>, so metrics will have names
8216 like C<collectd/cpu-0/cpu-user>. When setting this to something different, it
8217 is recommended but not required to include a trailing slash in I<Prefix>.
8219 =item B<Database> I<Index>
8221 This index selects the redis database to use for writing operations. Defaults
8222 to C<0>.
8224 =item B<MaxSetSize> I<Items>
8226 The B<MaxSetSize> option limits the number of items that the I<Sorted Sets> can
8227 hold. Negative values for I<Items> sets no limit, which is the default behavior.
8229 =item B<StoreRates> B<true>|B<false>
8231 If set to B<true> (the default), convert counter values to rates. If set to
8232 B<false> counter values are stored as is, i.e. as an increasing integer number.
8234 =back
8236 =head2 Plugin C<write_riemann>
8238 The I<write_riemann plugin> will send values to I<Riemann>, a powerful stream
8239 aggregation and monitoring system. The plugin sends I<Protobuf> encoded data to
8240 I<Riemann> using UDP packets.
8242 Synopsis:
8244 <Plugin "write_riemann">
8245 <Node "example">
8246 Host "localhost"
8247 Port "5555"
8248 Protocol UDP
8249 StoreRates true
8250 AlwaysAppendDS false
8251 TTLFactor 2.0
8252 </Node>
8253 Tag "foobar"
8254 Attribute "foo" "bar"
8255 </Plugin>
8257 The following options are understood by the I<write_riemann plugin>:
8259 =over 4
8261 =item E<lt>B<Node> I<Name>E<gt>
8263 The plugin's configuration consists of one or more B<Node> blocks. Each block
8264 is given a unique I<Name> and specifies one connection to an instance of
8265 I<Riemann>. Indise the B<Node> block, the following per-connection options are
8266 understood:
8268 =over 4
8270 =item B<Host> I<Address>
8272 Hostname or address to connect to. Defaults to C<localhost>.
8274 =item B<Port> I<Service>
8276 Service name or port number to connect to. Defaults to C<5555>.
8278 =item B<Protocol> B<UDP>|B<TCP>|B<TLS>
8280 Specify the protocol to use when communicating with I<Riemann>. Defaults to
8281 B<TCP>.
8283 =item B<TLSCertFile> I<Path>
8285 When using the B<TLS> protocol, path to a PEM certificate to present
8286 to remote host.
8288 =item B<TLSCAFile> I<Path>
8290 When using the B<TLS> protocol, path to a PEM CA certificate to
8291 use to validate the remote hosts's identity.
8293 =item B<TLSKeyFile> I<Path>
8295 When using the B<TLS> protocol, path to a PEM private key associated
8296 with the certificate defined by B<TLSCertFile>.
8298 =item B<Batch> B<true>|B<false>
8300 If set to B<true> and B<Protocol> is set to B<TCP>,
8301 events will be batched in memory and flushed at
8302 regular intervals or when B<BatchMaxSize> is exceeded.
8304 Notifications are not batched and sent as soon as possible.
8306 When enabled, it can occur that events get processed by the Riemann server
8307 close to or after their expiration time. Tune the B<TTLFactor> and
8308 B<BatchMaxSize> settings according to the amount of values collected, if this
8309 is an issue.
8311 Defaults to true
8313 =item B<BatchMaxSize> I<size>
8315 Maximum payload size for a riemann packet. Defaults to 8192
8317 =item B<BatchFlushTimeout> I<seconds>
8319 Maximum amount of seconds to wait in between to batch flushes.
8320 No timeout by default.
8322 =item B<StoreRates> B<true>|B<false>
8324 If set to B<true> (the default), convert counter values to rates. If set to
8325 B<false> counter values are stored as is, i.e. as an increasing integer number.
8327 This will be reflected in the C<ds_type> tag: If B<StoreRates> is enabled,
8328 converted values will have "rate" appended to the data source type, e.g.
8329 C<ds_type:derive:rate>.
8331 =item B<AlwaysAppendDS> B<false>|B<true>
8333 If set to B<true>, append the name of the I<Data Source> (DS) to the
8334 "service", i.e. the field that, together with the "host" field, uniquely
8335 identifies a metric in I<Riemann>. If set to B<false> (the default), this is
8336 only done when there is more than one DS.
8338 =item B<TTLFactor> I<Factor>
8340 I<Riemann> events have a I<Time to Live> (TTL) which specifies how long each
8341 event is considered active. I<collectd> populates this field based on the
8342 metrics interval setting. This setting controls the factor with which the
8343 interval is multiplied to set the TTL. The default value is B<2.0>. Unless you
8344 know exactly what you're doing, you should only increase this setting from its
8345 default value.
8347 =item B<Notifications> B<false>|B<true>
8349 If set to B<true>, create riemann events for notifications. This is B<true>
8350 by default. When processing thresholds from write_riemann, it might prove
8351 useful to avoid getting notification events.
8353 =item B<CheckThresholds> B<false>|B<true>
8355 If set to B<true>, attach state to events based on thresholds defined
8356 in the B<Threshold> plugin. Defaults to B<false>.
8358 =item B<EventServicePrefix> I<String>
8360 Add the given string as a prefix to the event service name.
8361 If B<EventServicePrefix> not set or set to an empty string (""),
8362 no prefix will be used.
8364 =back
8366 =item B<Tag> I<String>
8368 Add the given string as an additional tag to the metric being sent to
8369 I<Riemann>.
8371 =item B<Attribute> I<String> I<String>
8373 Consider the two given strings to be the key and value of an additional
8374 attribute for each metric being sent out to I<Riemann>.
8376 =back
8378 =head2 Plugin C<write_sensu>
8380 The I<write_sensu plugin> will send values to I<Sensu>, a powerful stream
8381 aggregation and monitoring system. The plugin sends I<JSON> encoded data to
8382 a local I<Sensu> client using a TCP socket.
8384 At the moment, the I<write_sensu plugin> does not send over a collectd_host
8385 parameter so it is not possible to use one collectd instance as a gateway for
8386 others. Each collectd host must pair with one I<Sensu> client.
8388 Synopsis:
8390 <Plugin "write_sensu">
8391 <Node "example">
8392 Host "localhost"
8393 Port "3030"
8394 StoreRates true
8395 AlwaysAppendDS false
8396 MetricHandler "influx"
8397 MetricHandler "default"
8398 NotificationHandler "flapjack"
8399 NotificationHandler "howling_monkey"
8400 Notifications true
8401 </Node>
8402 Tag "foobar"
8403 Attribute "foo" "bar"
8404 </Plugin>
8406 The following options are understood by the I<write_sensu plugin>:
8408 =over 4
8410 =item E<lt>B<Node> I<Name>E<gt>
8412 The plugin's configuration consists of one or more B<Node> blocks. Each block
8413 is given a unique I<Name> and specifies one connection to an instance of
8414 I<Sensu>. Inside the B<Node> block, the following per-connection options are
8415 understood:
8417 =over 4
8419 =item B<Host> I<Address>
8421 Hostname or address to connect to. Defaults to C<localhost>.
8423 =item B<Port> I<Service>
8425 Service name or port number to connect to. Defaults to C<3030>.
8427 =item B<StoreRates> B<true>|B<false>
8429 If set to B<true> (the default), convert counter values to rates. If set to
8430 B<false> counter values are stored as is, i.e. as an increasing integer number.
8432 This will be reflected in the C<collectd_data_source_type> tag: If
8433 B<StoreRates> is enabled, converted values will have "rate" appended to the
8434 data source type, e.g. C<collectd_data_source_type:derive:rate>.
8436 =item B<AlwaysAppendDS> B<false>|B<true>
8438 If set the B<true>, append the name of the I<Data Source> (DS) to the
8439 "service", i.e. the field that, together with the "host" field, uniquely
8440 identifies a metric in I<Sensu>. If set to B<false> (the default), this is
8441 only done when there is more than one DS.
8443 =item B<Notifications> B<false>|B<true>
8445 If set to B<true>, create I<Sensu> events for notifications. This is B<false>
8446 by default. At least one of B<Notifications> or B<Metrics> should be enabled.
8448 =item B<Metrics> B<false>|B<true>
8450 If set to B<true>, create I<Sensu> events for metrics. This is B<false>
8451 by default. At least one of B<Notifications> or B<Metrics> should be enabled.
8454 =item B<Separator> I<String>
8456 Sets the separator for I<Sensu> metrics name or checks. Defaults to "/".
8458 =item B<MetricHandler> I<String>
8460 Add a handler that will be set when metrics are sent to I<Sensu>. You can add
8461 several of them, one per line. Defaults to no handler.
8463 =item B<NotificationHandler> I<String>
8465 Add a handler that will be set when notifications are sent to I<Sensu>. You can
8466 add several of them, one per line. Defaults to no handler.
8468 =item B<EventServicePrefix> I<String>
8470 Add the given string as a prefix to the event service name.
8471 If B<EventServicePrefix> not set or set to an empty string (""),
8472 no prefix will be used.
8474 =back
8476 =item B<Tag> I<String>
8478 Add the given string as an additional tag to the metric being sent to
8479 I<Sensu>.
8481 =item B<Attribute> I<String> I<String>
8483 Consider the two given strings to be the key and value of an additional
8484 attribute for each metric being sent out to I<Sensu>.
8486 =back
8488 =head2 Plugin C<xencpu>
8490 This plugin collects metrics of hardware CPU load for machine running Xen
8491 hypervisor. Load is calculated from 'idle time' value, provided by Xen.
8492 Result is reported using the C<percent> type, for each CPU (core).
8494 This plugin doesn't have any options (yet).
8496 =head2 Plugin C<zookeeper>
8498 The I<zookeeper plugin> will collect statistics from a I<Zookeeper> server
8499 using the mntr command. It requires Zookeeper 3.4.0+ and access to the
8500 client port.
8502 B<Synopsis:>
8504 <Plugin "zookeeper">
8505 Host "127.0.0.1"
8506 Port "2181"
8507 </Plugin>
8509 =over 4
8511 =item B<Host> I<Address>
8513 Hostname or address to connect to. Defaults to C<localhost>.
8515 =item B<Port> I<Service>
8517 Service name or port number to connect to. Defaults to C<2181>.
8519 =back
8521 =head1 THRESHOLD CONFIGURATION
8523 Starting with version C<4.3.0> collectd has support for B<monitoring>. By that
8524 we mean that the values are not only stored or sent somewhere, but that they
8525 are judged and, if a problem is recognized, acted upon. The only action
8526 collectd takes itself is to generate and dispatch a "notification". Plugins can
8527 register to receive notifications and perform appropriate further actions.
8529 Since systems and what you expect them to do differ a lot, you can configure
8530 B<thresholds> for your values freely. This gives you a lot of flexibility but
8531 also a lot of responsibility.
8533 Every time a value is out of range a notification is dispatched. This means
8534 that the idle percentage of your CPU needs to be less then the configured
8535 threshold only once for a notification to be generated. There's no such thing
8536 as a moving average or similar - at least not now.
8538 Also, all values that match a threshold are considered to be relevant or
8539 "interesting". As a consequence collectd will issue a notification if they are
8540 not received for B<Timeout> iterations. The B<Timeout> configuration option is
8541 explained in section L<"GLOBAL OPTIONS">. If, for example, B<Timeout> is set to
8542 "2" (the default) and some hosts sends it's CPU statistics to the server every
8543 60 seconds, a notification will be dispatched after about 120 seconds. It may
8544 take a little longer because the timeout is checked only once each B<Interval>
8545 on the server.
8547 When a value comes within range again or is received after it was missing, an
8548 "OKAY-notification" is dispatched.
8550 Here is a configuration example to get you started. Read below for more
8551 information.
8553 <Plugin threshold>
8554 <Type "foo">
8555 WarningMin 0.00
8556 WarningMax 1000.00
8557 FailureMin 0.00
8558 FailureMax 1200.00
8559 Invert false
8560 Instance "bar"
8561 </Type>
8563 <Plugin "interface">
8564 Instance "eth0"
8565 <Type "if_octets">
8566 FailureMax 10000000
8567 DataSource "rx"
8568 </Type>
8569 </Plugin>
8571 <Host "hostname">
8572 <Type "cpu">
8573 Instance "idle"
8574 FailureMin 10
8575 </Type>
8577 <Plugin "memory">
8578 <Type "memory">
8579 Instance "cached"
8580 WarningMin 100000000
8581 </Type>
8582 </Plugin>
8583 </Host>
8584 </Plugin>
8586 There are basically two types of configuration statements: The C<Host>,
8587 C<Plugin>, and C<Type> blocks select the value for which a threshold should be
8588 configured. The C<Plugin> and C<Type> blocks may be specified further using the
8589 C<Instance> option. You can combine the block by nesting the blocks, though
8590 they must be nested in the above order, i.E<nbsp>e. C<Host> may contain either
8591 C<Plugin> and C<Type> blocks, C<Plugin> may only contain C<Type> blocks and
8592 C<Type> may not contain other blocks. If multiple blocks apply to the same
8593 value the most specific block is used.
8595 The other statements specify the threshold to configure. They B<must> be
8596 included in a C<Type> block. Currently the following statements are recognized:
8598 =over 4
8600 =item B<FailureMax> I<Value>
8602 =item B<WarningMax> I<Value>
8604 Sets the upper bound of acceptable values. If unset defaults to positive
8605 infinity. If a value is greater than B<FailureMax> a B<FAILURE> notification
8606 will be created. If the value is greater than B<WarningMax> but less than (or
8607 equal to) B<FailureMax> a B<WARNING> notification will be created.
8609 =item B<FailureMin> I<Value>
8611 =item B<WarningMin> I<Value>
8613 Sets the lower bound of acceptable values. If unset defaults to negative
8614 infinity. If a value is less than B<FailureMin> a B<FAILURE> notification will
8615 be created. If the value is less than B<WarningMin> but greater than (or equal
8616 to) B<FailureMin> a B<WARNING> notification will be created.
8618 =item B<DataSource> I<DSName>
8620 Some data sets have more than one "data source". Interesting examples are the
8621 C<if_octets> data set, which has received (C<rx>) and sent (C<tx>) bytes and
8622 the C<disk_ops> data set, which holds C<read> and C<write> operations. The
8623 system load data set, C<load>, even has three data sources: C<shortterm>,
8624 C<midterm>, and C<longterm>.
8626 Normally, all data sources are checked against a configured threshold. If this
8627 is undesirable, or if you want to specify different limits for each data
8628 source, you can use the B<DataSource> option to have a threshold apply only to
8629 one data source.
8631 =item B<Invert> B<true>|B<false>
8633 If set to B<true> the range of acceptable values is inverted, i.E<nbsp>e.
8634 values between B<FailureMin> and B<FailureMax> (B<WarningMin> and
8635 B<WarningMax>) are not okay. Defaults to B<false>.
8637 =item B<Persist> B<true>|B<false>
8639 Sets how often notifications are generated. If set to B<true> one notification
8640 will be generated for each value that is out of the acceptable range. If set to
8641 B<false> (the default) then a notification is only generated if a value is out
8642 of range but the previous value was okay.
8644 This applies to missing values, too: If set to B<true> a notification about a
8645 missing value is generated once every B<Interval> seconds. If set to B<false>
8646 only one such notification is generated until the value appears again.
8648 =item B<Percentage> B<true>|B<false>
8650 If set to B<true>, the minimum and maximum values given are interpreted as
8651 percentage value, relative to the other data sources. This is helpful for
8652 example for the "df" type, where you may want to issue a warning when less than
8653 5E<nbsp>% of the total space is available. Defaults to B<false>.
8655 =item B<Hits> I<Number>
8657 Delay creating the notification until the threshold has been passed I<Number>
8658 times. When a notification has been generated, or when a subsequent value is
8659 inside the threshold, the counter is reset. If, for example, a value is
8660 collected once every 10E<nbsp>seconds and B<Hits> is set to 3, a notification
8661 will be dispatched at most once every 30E<nbsp>seconds.
8663 This is useful when short bursts are not a problem. If, for example, 100% CPU
8664 usage for up to a minute is normal (and data is collected every
8665 10E<nbsp>seconds), you could set B<Hits> to B<6> to account for this.
8667 =item B<Hysteresis> I<Number>
8669 When set to non-zero, a hysteresis value is applied when checking minimum and
8670 maximum bounds. This is useful for values that increase slowly and fluctuate a
8671 bit while doing so. When these values come close to the threshold, they may
8672 "flap", i.e. switch between failure / warning case and okay case repeatedly.
8674 If, for example, the threshold is configures as
8676 WarningMax 100.0
8677 Hysteresis 1.0
8679 then a I<Warning> notification is created when the value exceeds I<101> and the
8680 corresponding I<Okay> notification is only created once the value falls below
8681 I<99>, thus avoiding the "flapping".
8683 =back
8685 =head1 FILTER CONFIGURATION
8687 Starting with collectd 4.6 there is a powerful filtering infrastructure
8688 implemented in the daemon. The concept has mostly been copied from
8689 I<ip_tables>, the packet filter infrastructure for Linux. We'll use a similar
8690 terminology, so that users that are familiar with iptables feel right at home.
8692 =head2 Terminology
8694 The following are the terms used in the remainder of the filter configuration
8695 documentation. For an ASCII-art schema of the mechanism, see
8696 L<"General structure"> below.
8698 =over 4
8700 =item B<Match>
8702 A I<match> is a criteria to select specific values. Examples are, of course, the
8703 name of the value or it's current value.
8705 Matches are implemented in plugins which you have to load prior to using the
8706 match. The name of such plugins starts with the "match_" prefix.
8708 =item B<Target>
8710 A I<target> is some action that is to be performed with data. Such actions
8711 could, for example, be to change part of the value's identifier or to ignore
8712 the value completely.
8714 Some of these targets are built into the daemon, see L<"Built-in targets">
8715 below. Other targets are implemented in plugins which you have to load prior to
8716 using the target. The name of such plugins starts with the "target_" prefix.
8718 =item B<Rule>
8720 The combination of any number of matches and at least one target is called a
8721 I<rule>. The target actions will be performed for all values for which B<all>
8722 matches apply. If the rule does not have any matches associated with it, the
8723 target action will be performed for all values.
8725 =item B<Chain>
8727 A I<chain> is a list of rules and possibly default targets. The rules are tried
8728 in order and if one matches, the associated target will be called. If a value
8729 is handled by a rule, it depends on the target whether or not any subsequent
8730 rules are considered or if traversal of the chain is aborted, see
8731 L<"Flow control"> below. After all rules have been checked, the default targets
8732 will be executed.
8734 =back
8736 =head2 General structure
8738 The following shows the resulting structure:
8740 +---------+
8741 ! Chain !
8742 +---------+
8743 !
8744 V
8745 +---------+ +---------+ +---------+ +---------+
8746 ! Rule !->! Match !->! Match !->! Target !
8747 +---------+ +---------+ +---------+ +---------+
8748 !
8749 V
8750 +---------+ +---------+ +---------+
8751 ! Rule !->! Target !->! Target !
8752 +---------+ +---------+ +---------+
8753 !
8754 V
8755 :
8756 :
8757 !
8758 V
8759 +---------+ +---------+ +---------+
8760 ! Rule !->! Match !->! Target !
8761 +---------+ +---------+ +---------+
8762 !
8763 V
8764 +---------+
8765 ! Default !
8766 ! Target !
8767 +---------+
8769 =head2 Flow control
8771 There are four ways to control which way a value takes through the filter
8772 mechanism:
8774 =over 4
8776 =item B<jump>
8778 The built-in B<jump> target can be used to "call" another chain, i.E<nbsp>e.
8779 process the value with another chain. When the called chain finishes, usually
8780 the next target or rule after the jump is executed.
8782 =item B<stop>
8784 The stop condition, signaled for example by the built-in target B<stop>, causes
8785 all processing of the value to be stopped immediately.
8787 =item B<return>
8789 Causes processing in the current chain to be aborted, but processing of the
8790 value generally will continue. This means that if the chain was called via
8791 B<Jump>, the next target or rule after the jump will be executed. If the chain
8792 was not called by another chain, control will be returned to the daemon and it
8793 may pass the value to another chain.
8795 =item B<continue>
8797 Most targets will signal the B<continue> condition, meaning that processing
8798 should continue normally. There is no special built-in target for this
8799 condition.
8801 =back
8803 =head2 Synopsis
8805 The configuration reflects this structure directly:
8807 PostCacheChain "PostCache"
8808 <Chain "PostCache">
8809 <Rule "ignore_mysql_show">
8810 <Match "regex">
8811 Plugin "^mysql$"
8812 Type "^mysql_command$"
8813 TypeInstance "^show_"
8814 </Match>
8815 <Target "stop">
8816 </Target>
8817 </Rule>
8818 <Target "write">
8819 Plugin "rrdtool"
8820 </Target>
8821 </Chain>
8823 The above configuration example will ignore all values where the plugin field
8824 is "mysql", the type is "mysql_command" and the type instance begins with
8825 "show_". All other values will be sent to the C<rrdtool> write plugin via the
8826 default target of the chain. Since this chain is run after the value has been
8827 added to the cache, the MySQL C<show_*> command statistics will be available
8828 via the C<unixsock> plugin.
8830 =head2 List of configuration options
8832 =over 4
8834 =item B<PreCacheChain> I<ChainName>
8836 =item B<PostCacheChain> I<ChainName>
8838 Configure the name of the "pre-cache chain" and the "post-cache chain". The
8839 argument is the name of a I<chain> that should be executed before and/or after
8840 the values have been added to the cache.
8842 To understand the implications, it's important you know what is going on inside
8843 I<collectd>. The following diagram shows how values are passed from the
8844 read-plugins to the write-plugins:
8846 +---------------+
8847 ! Read-Plugin !
8848 +-------+-------+
8849 !
8850 + - - - - V - - - - +
8851 : +---------------+ :
8852 : ! Pre-Cache ! :
8853 : ! Chain ! :
8854 : +-------+-------+ :
8855 : ! :
8856 : V :
8857 : +-------+-------+ : +---------------+
8858 : ! Cache !--->! Value Cache !
8859 : ! insert ! : +---+---+-------+
8860 : +-------+-------+ : ! !
8861 : ! ,------------' !
8862 : V V : V
8863 : +-------+---+---+ : +-------+-------+
8864 : ! Post-Cache +--->! Write-Plugins !
8865 : ! Chain ! : +---------------+
8866 : +---------------+ :
8867 : :
8868 : dispatch values :
8869 + - - - - - - - - - +
8871 After the values are passed from the "read" plugins to the dispatch functions,
8872 the pre-cache chain is run first. The values are added to the internal cache
8873 afterwards. The post-cache chain is run after the values have been added to the
8874 cache. So why is it such a huge deal if chains are run before or after the
8875 values have been added to this cache?
8877 Targets that change the identifier of a value list should be executed before
8878 the values are added to the cache, so that the name in the cache matches the
8879 name that is used in the "write" plugins. The C<unixsock> plugin, too, uses
8880 this cache to receive a list of all available values. If you change the
8881 identifier after the value list has been added to the cache, this may easily
8882 lead to confusion, but it's not forbidden of course.
8884 The cache is also used to convert counter values to rates. These rates are, for
8885 example, used by the C<value> match (see below). If you use the rate stored in
8886 the cache B<before> the new value is added, you will use the old, B<previous>
8887 rate. Write plugins may use this rate, too, see the C<csv> plugin, for example.
8888 The C<unixsock> plugin uses these rates too, to implement the C<GETVAL>
8889 command.
8891 Last but not last, the B<stop> target makes a difference: If the pre-cache
8892 chain returns the stop condition, the value will not be added to the cache and
8893 the post-cache chain will not be run.
8895 =item B<Chain> I<Name>
8897 Adds a new chain with a certain name. This name can be used to refer to a
8898 specific chain, for example to jump to it.
8900 Within the B<Chain> block, there can be B<Rule> blocks and B<Target> blocks.
8902 =item B<Rule> [I<Name>]
8904 Adds a new rule to the current chain. The name of the rule is optional and
8905 currently has no meaning for the daemon.
8907 Within the B<Rule> block, there may be any number of B<Match> blocks and there
8908 must be at least one B<Target> block.
8910 =item B<Match> I<Name>
8912 Adds a match to a B<Rule> block. The name specifies what kind of match should
8913 be performed. Available matches depend on the plugins that have been loaded.
8915 The arguments inside the B<Match> block are passed to the plugin implementing
8916 the match, so which arguments are valid here depends on the plugin being used.
8917 If you do not need any to pass any arguments to a match, you can use the
8918 shorter syntax:
8920 Match "foobar"
8922 Which is equivalent to:
8924 <Match "foobar">
8925 </Match>
8927 =item B<Target> I<Name>
8929 Add a target to a rule or a default target to a chain. The name specifies what
8930 kind of target is to be added. Which targets are available depends on the
8931 plugins being loaded.
8933 The arguments inside the B<Target> block are passed to the plugin implementing
8934 the target, so which arguments are valid here depends on the plugin being used.
8935 If you do not need any to pass any arguments to a target, you can use the
8936 shorter syntax:
8938 Target "stop"
8940 This is the same as writing:
8942 <Target "stop">
8943 </Target>
8945 =back
8947 =head2 Built-in targets
8949 The following targets are built into the core daemon and therefore need no
8950 plugins to be loaded:
8952 =over 4
8954 =item B<return>
8956 Signals the "return" condition, see the L<"Flow control"> section above. This
8957 causes the current chain to stop processing the value and returns control to
8958 the calling chain. The calling chain will continue processing targets and rules
8959 just after the B<jump> target (see below). This is very similar to the
8960 B<RETURN> target of iptables, see L<iptables(8)>.
8962 This target does not have any options.
8964 Example:
8966 Target "return"
8968 =item B<stop>
8970 Signals the "stop" condition, see the L<"Flow control"> section above. This
8971 causes processing of the value to be aborted immediately. This is similar to
8972 the B<DROP> target of iptables, see L<iptables(8)>.
8974 This target does not have any options.
8976 Example:
8978 Target "stop"
8980 =item B<write>
8982 Sends the value to "write" plugins.
8984 Available options:
8986 =over 4
8988 =item B<Plugin> I<Name>
8990 Name of the write plugin to which the data should be sent. This option may be
8991 given multiple times to send the data to more than one write plugin. If the
8992 plugin supports multiple instances, the plugin's instance(s) must also be
8993 specified.
8995 =back
8997 If no plugin is explicitly specified, the values will be sent to all available
8998 write plugins.
9000 Single-instance plugin example:
9002 <Target "write">
9003 Plugin "rrdtool"
9004 </Target>
9006 Multi-instance plugin example:
9008 <Plugin "write_graphite">
9009 <Node "foo">
9010 ...
9011 </Node>
9012 <Node "bar">
9013 ...
9014 </Node>
9015 </Plugin>
9016 ...
9017 <Target "write">
9018 Plugin "write_graphite/foo"
9019 </Target>
9021 =item B<jump>
9023 Starts processing the rules of another chain, see L<"Flow control"> above. If
9024 the end of that chain is reached, or a stop condition is encountered,
9025 processing will continue right after the B<jump> target, i.E<nbsp>e. with the
9026 next target or the next rule. This is similar to the B<-j> command line option
9027 of iptables, see L<iptables(8)>.
9029 Available options:
9031 =over 4
9033 =item B<Chain> I<Name>
9035 Jumps to the chain I<Name>. This argument is required and may appear only once.
9037 =back
9039 Example:
9041 <Target "jump">
9042 Chain "foobar"
9043 </Target>
9045 =back
9047 =head2 Available matches
9049 =over 4
9051 =item B<regex>
9053 Matches a value using regular expressions.
9055 Available options:
9057 =over 4
9059 =item B<Host> I<Regex>
9061 =item B<Plugin> I<Regex>
9063 =item B<PluginInstance> I<Regex>
9065 =item B<Type> I<Regex>
9067 =item B<TypeInstance> I<Regex>
9069 Match values where the given regular expressions match the various fields of
9070 the identifier of a value. If multiple regular expressions are given, B<all>
9071 regexen must match for a value to match.
9073 =item B<Invert> B<false>|B<true>
9075 When set to B<true>, the result of the match is inverted, i.e. all value lists
9076 where all regular expressions apply are not matched, all other value lists are
9077 matched. Defaults to B<false>.
9079 =back
9081 Example:
9083 <Match "regex">
9084 Host "customer[0-9]+"
9085 Plugin "^foobar$"
9086 </Match>
9088 =item B<timediff>
9090 Matches values that have a time which differs from the time on the server.
9092 This match is mainly intended for servers that receive values over the
9093 C<network> plugin and write them to disk using the C<rrdtool> plugin. RRDtool
9094 is very sensitive to the timestamp used when updating the RRD files. In
9095 particular, the time must be ever increasing. If a misbehaving client sends one
9096 packet with a timestamp far in the future, all further packets with a correct
9097 time will be ignored because of that one packet. What's worse, such corrupted
9098 RRD files are hard to fix.
9100 This match lets one match all values B<outside> a specified time range
9101 (relative to the server's time), so you can use the B<stop> target (see below)
9102 to ignore the value, for example.
9104 Available options:
9106 =over 4
9108 =item B<Future> I<Seconds>
9110 Matches all values that are I<ahead> of the server's time by I<Seconds> or more
9111 seconds. Set to zero for no limit. Either B<Future> or B<Past> must be
9112 non-zero.
9114 =item B<Past> I<Seconds>
9116 Matches all values that are I<behind> of the server's time by I<Seconds> or
9117 more seconds. Set to zero for no limit. Either B<Future> or B<Past> must be
9118 non-zero.
9120 =back
9122 Example:
9124 <Match "timediff">
9125 Future 300
9126 Past 3600
9127 </Match>
9129 This example matches all values that are five minutes or more ahead of the
9130 server or one hour (or more) lagging behind.
9132 =item B<value>
9134 Matches the actual value of data sources against given minimumE<nbsp>/ maximum
9135 values. If a data-set consists of more than one data-source, all data-sources
9136 must match the specified ranges for a positive match.
9138 Available options:
9140 =over 4
9142 =item B<Min> I<Value>
9144 Sets the smallest value which still results in a match. If unset, behaves like
9145 negative infinity.
9147 =item B<Max> I<Value>
9149 Sets the largest value which still results in a match. If unset, behaves like
9150 positive infinity.
9152 =item B<Invert> B<true>|B<false>
9154 Inverts the selection. If the B<Min> and B<Max> settings result in a match,
9155 no-match is returned and vice versa. Please note that the B<Invert> setting
9156 only effects how B<Min> and B<Max> are applied to a specific value. Especially
9157 the B<DataSource> and B<Satisfy> settings (see below) are not inverted.
9159 =item B<DataSource> I<DSName> [I<DSName> ...]
9161 Select one or more of the data sources. If no data source is configured, all
9162 data sources will be checked. If the type handled by the match does not have a
9163 data source of the specified name(s), this will always result in no match
9164 (independent of the B<Invert> setting).
9166 =item B<Satisfy> B<Any>|B<All>
9168 Specifies how checking with several data sources is performed. If set to
9169 B<Any>, the match succeeds if one of the data sources is in the configured
9170 range. If set to B<All> the match only succeeds if all data sources are within
9171 the configured range. Default is B<All>.
9173 Usually B<All> is used for positive matches, B<Any> is used for negative
9174 matches. This means that with B<All> you usually check that all values are in a
9175 "good" range, while with B<Any> you check if any value is within a "bad" range
9176 (or outside the "good" range).
9178 =back
9180 Either B<Min> or B<Max>, but not both, may be unset.
9182 Example:
9184 # Match all values smaller than or equal to 100. Matches only if all data
9185 # sources are below 100.
9186 <Match "value">
9187 Max 100
9188 Satisfy "All"
9189 </Match>
9191 # Match if the value of any data source is outside the range of 0 - 100.
9192 <Match "value">
9193 Min 0
9194 Max 100
9195 Invert true
9196 Satisfy "Any"
9197 </Match>
9199 =item B<empty_counter>
9201 Matches all values with one or more data sources of type B<COUNTER> and where
9202 all counter values are zero. These counters usually I<never> increased since
9203 they started existing (and are therefore uninteresting), or got reset recently
9204 or overflowed and you had really, I<really> bad luck.
9206 Please keep in mind that ignoring such counters can result in confusing
9207 behavior: Counters which hardly ever increase will be zero for long periods of
9208 time. If the counter is reset for some reason (machine or service restarted,
9209 usually), the graph will be empty (NAN) for a long time. People may not
9210 understand why.
9212 =item B<hashed>
9214 Calculates a hash value of the host name and matches values according to that
9215 hash value. This makes it possible to divide all hosts into groups and match
9216 only values that are in a specific group. The intended use is in load
9217 balancing, where you want to handle only part of all data and leave the rest
9218 for other servers.
9220 The hashing function used tries to distribute the hosts evenly. First, it
9221 calculates a 32E<nbsp>bit hash value using the characters of the hostname:
9223 hash_value = 0;
9224 for (i = 0; host[i] != 0; i++)
9225 hash_value = (hash_value * 251) + host[i];
9227 The constant 251 is a prime number which is supposed to make this hash value
9228 more random. The code then checks the group for this host according to the
9229 I<Total> and I<Match> arguments:
9231 if ((hash_value % Total) == Match)
9232 matches;
9233 else
9234 does not match;
9236 Please note that when you set I<Total> to two (i.E<nbsp>e. you have only two
9237 groups), then the least significant bit of the hash value will be the XOR of
9238 all least significant bits in the host name. One consequence is that when you
9239 have two hosts, "server0.example.com" and "server1.example.com", where the host
9240 name differs in one digit only and the digits differ by one, those hosts will
9241 never end up in the same group.
9243 Available options:
9245 =over 4
9247 =item B<Match> I<Match> I<Total>
9249 Divide the data into I<Total> groups and match all hosts in group I<Match> as
9250 described above. The groups are numbered from zero, i.E<nbsp>e. I<Match> must
9251 be smaller than I<Total>. I<Total> must be at least one, although only values
9252 greater than one really do make any sense.
9254 You can repeat this option to match multiple groups, for example:
9256 Match 3 7
9257 Match 5 7
9259 The above config will divide the data into seven groups and match groups three
9260 and five. One use would be to keep every value on two hosts so that if one
9261 fails the missing data can later be reconstructed from the second host.
9263 =back
9265 Example:
9267 # Operate on the pre-cache chain, so that ignored values are not even in the
9268 # global cache.
9269 <Chain "PreCache">
9270 <Rule>
9271 <Match "hashed">
9272 # Divide all received hosts in seven groups and accept all hosts in
9273 # group three.
9274 Match 3 7
9275 </Match>
9276 # If matched: Return and continue.
9277 Target "return"
9278 </Rule>
9279 # If not matched: Return and stop.
9280 Target "stop"
9281 </Chain>
9283 =back
9285 =head2 Available targets
9287 =over 4
9289 =item B<notification>
9291 Creates and dispatches a notification.
9293 Available options:
9295 =over 4
9297 =item B<Message> I<String>
9299 This required option sets the message of the notification. The following
9300 placeholders will be replaced by an appropriate value:
9302 =over 4
9304 =item B<%{host}>
9306 =item B<%{plugin}>
9308 =item B<%{plugin_instance}>
9310 =item B<%{type}>
9312 =item B<%{type_instance}>
9314 These placeholders are replaced by the identifier field of the same name.
9316 =item B<%{ds:>I<name>B<}>
9318 These placeholders are replaced by a (hopefully) human readable representation
9319 of the current rate of this data source. If you changed the instance name
9320 (using the B<set> or B<replace> targets, see below), it may not be possible to
9321 convert counter values to rates.
9323 =back
9325 Please note that these placeholders are B<case sensitive>!
9327 =item B<Severity> B<"FAILURE">|B<"WARNING">|B<"OKAY">
9329 Sets the severity of the message. If omitted, the severity B<"WARNING"> is
9330 used.
9332 =back
9334 Example:
9336 <Target "notification">
9337 Message "Oops, the %{type_instance} temperature is currently %{ds:value}!"
9338 Severity "WARNING"
9339 </Target>
9341 =item B<replace>
9343 Replaces parts of the identifier using regular expressions.
9345 Available options:
9347 =over 4
9349 =item B<Host> I<Regex> I<Replacement>
9351 =item B<Plugin> I<Regex> I<Replacement>
9353 =item B<PluginInstance> I<Regex> I<Replacement>
9355 =item B<TypeInstance> I<Regex> I<Replacement>
9357 Match the appropriate field with the given regular expression I<Regex>. If the
9358 regular expression matches, that part that matches is replaced with
9359 I<Replacement>. If multiple places of the input buffer match a given regular
9360 expression, only the first occurrence will be replaced.
9362 You can specify each option multiple times to use multiple regular expressions
9363 one after another.
9365 =back
9367 Example:
9369 <Target "replace">
9370 # Replace "example.net" with "example.com"
9371 Host "\\<example.net\\>" "example.com"
9373 # Strip "www." from hostnames
9374 Host "\\<www\\." ""
9375 </Target>
9377 =item B<set>
9379 Sets part of the identifier of a value to a given string.
9381 Available options:
9383 =over 4
9385 =item B<Host> I<String>
9387 =item B<Plugin> I<String>
9389 =item B<PluginInstance> I<String>
9391 =item B<TypeInstance> I<String>
9393 =item B<MetaData> I<String> I<String>
9395 Set the appropriate field to the given string. The strings for plugin instance
9396 and type instance may be empty, the strings for host and plugin may not be
9397 empty. It's currently not possible to set the type of a value this way.
9399 =back
9401 Example:
9403 <Target "set">
9404 PluginInstance "coretemp"
9405 TypeInstance "core3"
9406 </Target>
9408 =back
9410 =head2 Backwards compatibility
9412 If you use collectd with an old configuration, i.E<nbsp>e. one without a
9413 B<Chain> block, it will behave as it used to. This is equivalent to the
9414 following configuration:
9416 <Chain "PostCache">
9417 Target "write"
9418 </Chain>
9420 If you specify a B<PostCacheChain>, the B<write> target will not be added
9421 anywhere and you will have to make sure that it is called where appropriate. We
9422 suggest to add the above snippet as default target to your "PostCache" chain.
9424 =head2 Examples
9426 Ignore all values, where the hostname does not contain a dot, i.E<nbsp>e. can't
9427 be an FQDN.
9429 <Chain "PreCache">
9430 <Rule "no_fqdn">
9431 <Match "regex">
9432 Host "^[^\.]*$"
9433 </Match>
9434 Target "stop"
9435 </Rule>
9436 Target "write"
9437 </Chain>
9439 =head1 SEE ALSO
9441 L<collectd(1)>,
9442 L<collectd-exec(5)>,
9443 L<collectd-perl(5)>,
9444 L<collectd-unixsock(5)>,
9445 L<types.db(5)>,
9446 L<hddtemp(8)>,
9447 L<iptables(8)>,
9448 L<kstat(3KSTAT)>,
9449 L<mbmon(1)>,
9450 L<psql(1)>,
9451 L<regex(7)>,
9452 L<rrdtool(1)>,
9453 L<sensors(1)>
9455 =head1 AUTHOR
9457 Florian Forster E<lt>octo@collectd.orgE<gt>
9459 =cut